Emerson NetSure 722 Bulk Output Power System Brochures and Data Sheets

Add to my manuals
166 Pages

advertisement

Emerson NetSure 722 Bulk Output Power System Brochures and Data Sheets | Manualzz

NetSure

ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Specification Number: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model Number: M820B, M820D

Model M820B Model M820D

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

This page is intentionally blank.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table of Contents

Admonishments Used in this Document .............................................................................................................. vii

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 1

Preface ................................................................................................................................................................... 1

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................ 1

Function Descriptions ............................................................................................................................................. 2

Rectifier Control .............................................................................................................................................. 2

Converter Control ............................................................................................................................................ 2

System Components Monitoring and System Alarms Generation ..................................................................... 2

Operating Data Acquisition and Data Logs ....................................................................................................... 2

Battery Management ....................................................................................................................................... 2

General Battery Management ................................................................................................................... 2

Spec. No. 588820300 Battery Rack System (Lithium Ion Battery Configuration) ......................................... 3

Battery Charge Temperature Compensation ............................................................................................. 3

Battery Equalize Charge and Battery Charge Current Limit ......................................................................... 3

High and Low Battery Temperature Alarms ............................................................................................... 4

Battery Thermal Runaway Management (BTRM) Feature ........................................................................... 4

Battery Discharge Test and Battery Test Logs ............................................................................................ 4

Battery LVD (Low Voltage Disconnect) ...................................................................................................... 5

Battery Capacity Prediction ....................................................................................................................... 5

Battery Block and Battery Midpoint Monitoring ......................................................................................... 5

Enhanced Battery Monitoring with SM-BRC ............................................................................................... 5

Thermal Runaway Detection and Management ......................................................................................... 5

Intelligent Power Matching (Energy Optimization Mode) .................................................................................. 5

Power Split Feature .......................................................................................................................................... 6

Diesel Management Feature ............................................................................................................................ 6

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function ................................................................................................ 6

Supervisory Module (SM Modules) Monitoring ................................................................................................. 6

Hybrid Control Function .................................................................................................................................. 6

General .................................................................................................................................................... 7

Hybrid Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 7

Early Termination of the Discharge Periods ............................................................................................... 8

Operation with Grid Power ....................................................................................................................... 8

Relay Assignment – when in Hybrid Mode ................................................................................................. 9

Fixed Daily ................................................................................................................................................ 9

Capacity Discharge ................................................................................................................................... 9

Maximum Current Limit Function ................................................................................................................... 10

Operation ........................................................................................................................................................... 11

Local Indicators ..................................................................................................................................................... 11

Passwords and Access Levels ................................................................................................................................. 12

Local Keypad and Display Access ........................................................................................................................... 13

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D i Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Local Menu Navigation Keys and LCD Display .................................................................................................. 13

Local Display Menus ....................................................................................................................................... 13

Navigating the Menus ............................................................................................................................. 13

WEB Interface Access ............................................................................................................................................ 14

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 14

Setting IP Communications Parameters ................................................................................................... 14

WEB Interface Menus .............................................................................................................................. 14

Connecting to the Controller (over a network connection) ....................................................................... 14

Connecting the Controller Directly to your Computer .............................................................................. 14

Disabling Proxy Server Settings to Enable a Connection to the Controller over an Intranet

Network (if required) .............................................................................................................................. 14

Internet Security Settings for Loading Files or Downloading Files into the ACU+ ....................................... 15

Logging into the Controller ..................................................................................................................... 17

Common Tasks Performed via the Local Keypad and/or Web Interface ................................................................... 18

Procedures .................................................................................................................................................... 18

Changing the Local LCD Display Contrast................................................................................................. 18

Disabling the Local Keypad Sound ........................................................................................................... 18

Changing the Date .................................................................................................................................. 18

Changing the Time ................................................................................................................................. 18

Setting IP Communications Parameters ................................................................................................... 18

Viewing/Changing the Float Voltage Setting ........................................................................................... 18

Viewing/Changing the Equalize Voltage Setting ...................................................................................... 18

Setting Battery Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 18

Setting Battery Capacity Parameters ....................................................................................................... 19

Setting Temperature Sensors .................................................................................................................. 19

Setting Battery Charge Temperature Compensation ................................................................................ 20

Setting Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown ................................................................................................. 20

Setting Rectifier Current Limit ................................................................................................................. 20

Setting Over Voltage Alarm 1 .................................................................................................................. 20

Setting Over Voltage Alarm 2 .................................................................................................................. 20

Setting Under Voltage Alarm 1 ................................................................................................................ 20

Setting Under Voltage Alarm 2 ................................................................................................................ 20

Configuring the ACU+ Identification of Rectifiers and Assigning which Input Phase is

Connected to the Rectifiers ..................................................................................................................... 20

Configuring the ACU+ Identification of Converters .................................................................................. 21

Setting Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 22

Setting Battery Block and Battery Midpoint Monitoring (if equipped with an EIB Assembly) ...................... 22

Setting External Shunts (connected to the EIB Assembly) ......................................................................... 22

Setting External Shunts (connected to the SM-DU+ Assembly) ................................................................. 22

Setting the Load Current Alarm ............................................................................................................... 23

Using the Relay Test Feature ................................................................................................................... 23

Programming the Audible Alarm Feature ................................................................................................. 24

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D ii Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Adding, Deleting, and Modifying Users ................................................................................................... 24

Assigning Severity Level to Alarms .......................................................................................................... 24

Assigning Relays to Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 24

Changing the Names of Items Displayed in the LCD and Web-Interface Menus ......................................... 24

Viewing Alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 24

Clearing Rectifier Lost, Rectifier Communication Fail, Converter Lost, Converter

Communication Fail, and All Converter Comm Fail Alarms ....................................................................... 24

Clearing SMTemp Lost and SMTemp Probe Alarms .................................................................................. 24

Clearing Battery Alarms .......................................................................................................................... 24

Clearing Logs .......................................................................................................................................... 25

Clearing the Maintenance Alarm ............................................................................................................. 25

Viewing the ACU+ Controller’s Device Inventory ..................................................................................... 25

Updating the ACU+ Controller’s Device Inventory ................................................................................... 25

Blocking Alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 25

Setting Auto Equalize ............................................................................................................................. 25

Placing the System in Float or Equalize Charge Mode ............................................................................... 26

Manually Forcing Relays .......................................................................................................................... 26

Manually Forcing LVDs ............................................................................................................................ 26

Backing Up the ACU+ Configuration ........................................................................................................ 26

Reloading a Backed-Up ACU+ Configuration ........................................................................................... 27

Upgrading the ACU+ Using an Application ("All") Package ........................................................................ 28

Reloading the Configuration Package Stored in the ACU+ Controller (Restoring Defaults) ........................ 29

Rebooting the Controller ........................................................................................................................ 29

Spec. No. 588820300 Battery Rack System (Lithium Ion Battery Configuration) .............................................. 29

Setting SNMP Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 29

Available Alarms ................................................................................................................................................... 30

Power Split Feature ............................................................................................................................................... 71

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 71

How Power Split Works ........................................................................................................................... 71

Operating Modes ................................................................................................................................... 71

Requirements and Conditions ................................................................................................................. 71

Paralleling the Existing and ACU+ Power Systems .................................................................................... 72

Programming the ACU+ Power Split Feature ........................................................................................... 73

Verifying the Operation of the Power Split Feature .................................................................................. 74

Local Display Menus ............................................................................................................................................ 75

Overview .............................................................................................................................................................. 75

Menus .................................................................................................................................................................. 75

General ......................................................................................................................................................... 75

Factory Default Setpoints ....................................................................................................................... 75

Adjustment Range Restrictions ............................................................................................................... 75

Description of Local Display (and Web Interface) Menus Line Items ........................................................................ 87

Settings Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 87

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D iii Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Alarm Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 87

Power System ......................................................................................................................................... 87

Rectifier .................................................................................................................................................. 89

Battery ................................................................................................................................................... 90

BattFuseUnit ........................................................................................................................................... 93

DC .......................................................................................................................................................... 93

LVD ........................................................................................................................................................ 93

AC .......................................................................................................................................................... 94

EIB .......................................................................................................................................................... 94

SMDU ..................................................................................................................................................... 95

Converter ............................................................................................................................................... 95

SMTemp ................................................................................................................................................. 95

Communication ...................................................................................................................................... 96

Controller ............................................................................................................................................... 96

Manual Menu ................................................................................................................................................. 96

Man/Auto Set ......................................................................................................................................... 97

Power System ......................................................................................................................................... 97

Rectifier .................................................................................................................................................. 97

Batt Group .............................................................................................................................................. 97

LVD ........................................................................................................................................................ 98

EIB .......................................................................................................................................................... 98

Converter ............................................................................................................................................... 98

SMTemp ................................................................................................................................................. 98

Quick Setting Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 99

Auto/Manual .......................................................................................................................................... 99

ECO Mode Set ......................................................................................................................................... 99

FLT/EQ Volts ........................................................................................................................................... 99

FLT/EQ Set .............................................................................................................................................. 99

Temp Comp.......................................................................................................................................... 100

Rectifier Expansion................................................................................................................................ 100

WEB Interface Menus ........................................................................................................................................ 102

Overview ............................................................................................................................................................ 102

Homepage .......................................................................................................................................................... 102

Menu Navigation Window ................................................................................................................................... 104

Alarms ......................................................................................................................................................... 105

Device Information Menu .................................................................................................................................... 107

Rectifier Group ............................................................................................................................................ 107

Status Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 107

Control Tab........................................................................................................................................... 108

Settings Tab.......................................................................................................................................... 109

Battery Group (except Li-Ion Battery Configuration) ...................................................................................... 112

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D iv Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Status Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 112

Control Tab .......................................................................................................................................... 113

Settings Tab ......................................................................................................................................... 114

Battery Group (Li-Ion Battery Configuration) ................................................................................................ 117

Status Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 117

Control Tab .......................................................................................................................................... 117

Settings Tab ......................................................................................................................................... 118

Individual Battery ................................................................................................................................. 118

Quick Settings Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 119

Query Menu........................................................................................................................................................ 120

Alarm History Log Sub-Menu ....................................................................................................................... 120

Data History Log Sub-Menu ......................................................................................................................... 121

Control/System/Diesel Log Sub-Menu .......................................................................................................... 122

Battery Test Log Sub-Menu .......................................................................................................................... 123

Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 124

Network Configuration Sub-Menu................................................................................................................ 124

NMSV2 (Network Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu (versions 1 and 2) .................................... 125

NMSV3 (Network Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu (version 3) ............................................... 126

HLMS (High Level Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu ................................................................ 127

Edit PowerSplit Sub-Menu ............................................................................................................................ 128

User Information Settings Sub-Menu............................................................................................................ 129

Adding a User ....................................................................................................................................... 129

Modifying an Existing User .................................................................................................................... 129

Deleting a User ..................................................................................................................................... 129

User Authority Level ............................................................................................................................. 130

Clear Data Sub-Menu ................................................................................................................................... 131

Restore Defaults Sub-Menu (Reloading the Configuration Package Stored in the ACU+ Controller) ................ 132

Download/Upload Sub-Menu ....................................................................................................................... 134

Retrieve ‘SettingParam.run’ File Sub-Menu .................................................................................................. 136

Time Sync Sub-Menu ................................................................................................................................... 137

System Inventory Sub-Menu ........................................................................................................................ 138

Configuration Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 139

Auto Configuration Sub-Menu ..................................................................................................................... 139

Site Information Modification Sub-Menu ...................................................................................................... 140

Equipment Information Modification Sub-Menu ........................................................................................... 141

Signal Information Modification Sub-Menu .................................................................................................. 142

Sample Signal Name Modification Procedure ........................................................................................ 142

Alarm Suppressing Sub-Menu ...................................................................................................................... 143

PLC Sub-Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 145

Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 145

Alarm Relay Sub-Menu ................................................................................................................................. 148

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D v Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Accessing the Controller via a Network Management System (NMS).................................................................. 149

General ............................................................................................................................................................... 149

NMS Supported by SNMP Agent .......................................................................................................................... 149

NMS Supported by SNMP v2 .................................................................................................................. 149

NMS Supported by SNMP v3 .................................................................................................................. 149

Parameter Setting in SNMP Manager ..................................................................................................... 150

MIB Installation ................................................................................................................................................... 150

Installation ................................................................................................................................................... 150

Contents of the Controller’s MIB ................................................................................................................... 150

Accessing the Controller through an NMS ............................................................................................................ 153

Apply Administrative Authority .................................................................................................................... 153

Add NMS through Web Browser ............................................................................................................ 153

Replacement Procedures ................................................................................................................................... 154

ACU+ Controller Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 154

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 155

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D vi Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Admonishments Used in this Document

DANGER! Warns of a hazard the reader will be exposed to that will likely result in death or serious injury if not avoided. (ANSI, OSHA)

Danger

Warning

Caution

WARNING! Warns of a potential hazard the reader may be exposed to that could result in death or serious injury if not avoided. This admonition is not used for situations that pose a risk only to equipment, software, data, or service. (ANSI)

CAUTION! Warns of a potential hazard the reader may be exposed to that could result in minor or moderate injury if not avoided. (ANSI, OSHA) This admonition is not used for situations that pose a risk only to equipment, data, or service, even if such use appears to be permitted in some of the applicable standards. (OSHA)

ALERT! Alerts the reader to an action that must be avoided in order to protect equipment, software, data, or service. (ISO)

Alert

ALERT! Alerts the reader to an action that must be performed in order to prevent equipment damage, software corruption, data loss, or service interruption. (ISO)

Alert

FIRE SAFETY! Informs the reader of fire safety information, reminders, precautions, or policies, or of the locations of fire-fighting and fire-safety equipment. (ISO)

Fire Safety

SAFETY! Informs the reader of general safety information, reminders, precautions, or policies not related to a particular source of hazard or to fire safety. (ISO, ANSI, OSHA)

Safety

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D vii Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

This page is intentionally blank.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D viii Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Introduction

Preface

These instructions describe the complete functionality of the

ACU+ Controller. Some functionality is dependent on hardware connected to the ACU+ Controller. Your system may not utilize all the functionality described.

Refer also to the ACU+ Configuration Drawing (C-drawing) furnished with your system for a list of factory default settings.

Overview

The ACU+ Controller performs the following functions.

• Rectifier Control, including an Energy Optimization

Mode

• Converter Control

• System Components Monitoring and System Alarms

Generation (including recording alarms in logs)

• Operating Data Acquisition and Data Logs

• Battery Management

Figure 1. ACU+ Remote Communications

• Intelligent Power Matching (Energy Optimization

Mode)

• Power Split Feature

• Diesel Management Feature

• PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

• Supervisory Module (SM Modules) Monitoring

• Hybrid Control Function

• Maximum Current Limit Function

The ACU+ controls the system automatically via configured parameters.

A User interfaces with the ACU+ Controller locally using the local keypad and LCD display or locally/remotely using the WEB

Interface.

The ACU+ Controller can also be accessed via SNMP (v1, v2, and v3).

Figure 1 illustrates the various methods to interface with the

ACU+ Controller remotely.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

1 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Function Descriptions

Rectifier Control

Rectifiers are automatically controlled by the ACU+ Controller. The

ACU+ Controller provides an Energy Optimization Mode function.

Energy Optimization permits an installation to only operate rectifiers as needed to maintain the load and keep batteries in a fully charged condition. As load increases, Energy Optimization turns on additional rectifiers as needed to maintain the load. As load decreases, Energy Optimization places rectifiers in standby to conserve energy usage. Rectifiers which are always operating to maintain any load requirements are cycled through the group of rectifiers controlled by this feature to provide uniform operating times for each rectifier.

Converter Control

Converters are automatically controlled by the ACU+ Controller.

System Components Monitoring and

System Alarms Generation

The ACU+ Controller monitors the components comprising the system (such as the rectifiers, converters, and supervisory modules) and generates alarms if a fault condition occurs. The

ACU+ Controller also maintains an alarm history log.

The available system alarms are programmed with an Alarm

Severity Level. Each Alarm Severity Level has different visual/audible alarm attributes. Available Alarm Severity Levels and

their attributes are listed in Table 1 .

Table 1. Alarm Severity Levels

• An audible alarm cutoff feature can be programmed that silences the audible alarm after a pre-set programmable time period. The audible alarm can also be disabled.

The available system alarms can also be mapped to alarm relays

(located on ACU+ interface boards) that can be wired to external alarm circuits.

Operating Data Acquisition and Data Logs

The ACU+ Controller acquires and analyses real time data from the system’s components such as the rectifiers, converters, and supervisory modules.

The ACU+ Controller uses this data to process alarms and also records data in logs. The logs are viewed using the WEB Interface and consist of the following. Logs can be saved in the text (.txt) format.

• Alarm History Log: records 600 latest alarms.

• Data History Log: records 60000 latest history data.

• Control Log: records 500 latest control events.

• System Log: records 3000 latest system events.

• Diesel Test Log: records 500 latest diesel test results.

• Battery Test Log: up to twelve (12) battery discharge tests can be performed and recorded per year.

Note: Once maximum number of log entries is reached, new entries overwrite oldest entries.

Battery Management

General Battery Management

Alarm

Severity

Level

ACU+ Red

Alarm

Indicator

ACU+ Yellow

Alarm

Indicator

ACU+

Audible

Alarm

Critical Alarm

(CA)

Major Alarm

(MJ)

Minor Alarm

(MN)

No Alarm

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

• The alarm indicator turns OFF if the fault(s) that triggered the alarm clears.

• The audible alarm can be silenced by pressing any key on the ACU+ Controller local interface pad. The audible alarm is also silenced if the fault(s) that triggered the alarm clears.

The ACU+ Controller provides the following battery management functions (except Lithium Ion Battery Configuration).

• Battery Charge Temperature Compensation

• Battery Equalize Charge

• Battery Charge Current Limit

• High and Low Battery Temperature Alarms

• Battery Thermal Runaway Management (BTRM) Feature

(Reduces Voltage during a High Battery Temperature

Condition)

• Battery Discharge Tests

• Battery Test Logs (maximum twelve [12] logs, maximum eighteen [18] battery strings per log)

• Battery LVD (Low Voltage Disconnect)

• Battery Capacity Prediction

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

2 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Battery Block and Battery Midpoint Monitoring

Enhanced Battery Monitoring with SM-BRC

Thermal Runaway Detection/Management

Spec. No. 588820300 Battery Rack System

(Lithium Ion Battery Configuration)

When the ACU+ is equipped with the Lithium Ion Battery

Configuration for use with Spec. No. 588820300 NetSure™ Battery

Rack System, the battery management functions are as follows.

• The configuration only provides the battery float charge voltage (equalize charging is not applicable).

• The only adjustable battery setting (besides the float voltage level) is the ABCL (Active Battery Charge Current

Limit) Point.

• Active Battery Charge Current Limit (ABCL): This feature controls the amount of charge current supplied to the lithium-ion batteries installed in the power plant to prevent failure of the batteries.

• Battery status and alarms sent by the batteries to the

ACU+ are displayed in the ACU+ interfaces.

• Refer also to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer for battery management functions built into the battery itself.

NOTE THAT THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE FOR THE

GENERAL BATTERY MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS AND DO NOT

APPLY TO THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY CONFIGURATION.

Battery Charge Temperature Compensation

The ACU+ Controller can be programmed to automatically increase or decrease system output voltage to maintain battery float current as battery temperature decreases or increases, respectively. Battery life can be extended when an optimum charge voltage to the battery with respect to temperature is maintained. Temperature is monitored by a sensor mounted on the battery. See your power system documentation for temperature sensor information. You can also set High2, High1, and Low compensation temperature alarms.

Functional Description (See Figure 2 ): Battery charge temperature

compensation adds a correction term, related to the temperature of the batteries, to the nominal value of the system voltage. The degree of regulation (TempComp Coeff), expressed in mV/°C/battery string, can be set per battery manufacturer recommendations.

To protect batteries and voltage-sensitive loads, compensation is automatically limited to a maximum of two volts (48V systems) or one volt (24 volt systems) above or below the nominal output level

(float setting).

Temperature compensation will also clamp if the voltage reaches either the TEMP COMP MAX V setting or the TEMP COMP MIN V setting. This feature can also be disabled.

Temperature compensation is automatically disabled if communication between the Controller and all rectifiers is lost, a

DC over or under voltage alarm activates, a low voltage disconnection occurs, manual mode is entered, or the system enters the boost or test modes.

Battery Equalize Charge and Battery Charge Current Limit

The ACU+ Controller can increase system output voltage for equalizing the charge on all battery cells of a conventional flooded cell battery, or for recharging the battery following a commercial power failure.

The charging function can be initiated cyclically (scheduled), automatically, or manually.

Refer to the battery manufacturer's instructions for equalize charging instructions.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (SEE FIGURE 3 ):

• Start of Charging: When the battery charge current exceeds a preset value for 3 minutes or if the calculated battery capacity has decreased to a preset value (after a commercial AC failure, for example), the charging function of the ACU+ is activated. A charging signal is sent from the ACU+ to the rectifiers to increase the voltage up to the battery charging level V equalize.

• Battery Current Limitation: After a commercial AC failure or when some battery cells are permanently damaged, the current to the batteries can be quite extensive. To avoid overheating or further damages to the battery, the

ACU+ limits the battery current to a preset level by limiting the charging voltage of the rectifiers. Should the battery current still exceed a higher preset value, an alarm is issued.

• End of Charging: When the charging current drops below a preset value, a defined prolonged charging time is started before the charging is stopped and the voltage of the rectifiers return to the float charging level (V nom

). For safety, there is a equalize charging limit time that stops the charging after a preset time.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

3 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 2. Temperature Compensated Voltage Control

V

TempComp Coeff setting (mV/°C).

1V Max (24V System)

2V Max (48V System)

1V Max (24V System)

2V Max (48V System)

V high

V nom

Upper voltage level where temperature compensation clamps the voltage. Limited to the TEMP COMP MAX V setting.

Nominal voltage (voltage at nominal temperature).

V low

Lower voltage level where temperature compensation clamps the voltage. Limited to the TEMP COMP MIN V setting.

T nom

T nom

Nominal temperature (no temperature compensation is done at this temperature).

This is the Temp Comp setting.

Figure 3. Voltage Characteristics on Commercial AC Failure and Automatic Equalize Charging

High and Low Battery Temperature Alarms Battery Discharge Test and Battery Test Logs

The ACU+ Controller can monitor battery temperature via a temperature sensor mounted on a battery cell. Values for high battery temperature and low battery temperature alarms can then be programmed into the ACU+ Controller.

Battery Thermal Runaway Management (BTRM) Feature

You can designate a temperature sensor as the BTRM sensor. The

BTRM sensor has High2 and High1 BTRM temperature alarm limits.

If battery temperature exceeds the “BTRM Temp High2” setting, system voltage is lowered to the BTRM voltage setting. This feature can also be disabled.

The ACU+ Controller can perform battery discharge tests to check the condition of the battery. There are (3) types of battery discharge tests.

• Short Time Test

• Time Test

• Stable Current Test

A User can manually start a battery discharge test or program the

ACU+ Controller to automatically start battery discharge tests at scheduled intervals (cyclic battery tests). During a battery discharge test, the ACU+ Controller controls the rectifiers output to place the entire load or partial load on the batteries. The ACU+

Controller monitors the discharge of the battery and saves the results in a battery test log.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

4 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Functional Description: For manual battery discharge tests as well as for cyclic battery discharge tests, the following parameters must be set: End Voltage, Test Time, and Battery Capacity Discharge

Limit. See Figure 4 .

Figure 4. Battery Test Diagram

• Voltage Controlled Disconnection: When the set voltage level is reached, the batteries are disconnected.

• Time Controlled Disconnection: When the set time has elapsed, the batteries are disconnected.

Battery Capacity Prediction

The ACU+ can predict battery capacity.

Battery Block and Battery Midpoint Monitoring

The ACU+ can monitor battery blocks (12V blocks) or midpoint battery voltage of battery strings connected to the EIB assembly.

An alarm is issued when either battery block voltage or battery midpoint voltage is abnormal.

Enhanced Battery Monitoring with SM-BRC

BATTERY DISCHARGE TEST SEQUENCE:

• In time test modes, the output voltage of the rectifiers is reduced so that only the batteries power the load. If the batteries fail, the rectifiers power the load.

• In stable current test mode, the output voltage of the rectifiers is reduced so that the batteries supply the preset test current to the load.

• The battery test continues until one of the following occurs: a.

The preset test time, see Figure 4 , expires. The

battery has passed the test. b.

The battery voltage drops below the preset end voltage level (V end

) ( Figure 4 ). The battery has not

passed the test and the test is interrupted. A battery test alarm is activated. c.

The battery capacity drops below the preset test end battery capacity. The battery has not passed the test and the test is interrupted. A battery test alarm is activated.

• After the battery discharge test, the output voltage of the rectifiers increase so that the rectifiers supply the system and charge the batteries.

Battery LVD (Low Voltage Disconnect)

To prevent serious damage to the batteries during a commercial

AC power failure, the batteries can be disconnected by voltage or time control.

The batteries are reconnected automatically when commercial AC power is restored and a predetermined DC voltage level is reached.

When connected to an SM-BRC, the ACU+ provides enhanced battery monitoring.

Thermal Runaway Detection and Management

Functional Description: The system uses several control mechanisms to avoid thermal runaway.

First: During a short high rate discharge, the batteries will normally get hot. The ACU+ takes this into consideration. After completion of the discharge duty, the batteries are recharged with a limited current to avoid heating the batteries any further.

Second: The temperature of the batteries can be monitored, and the ACU+ sets the charge voltage appropriately, as previously described under Battery Charge Temperature Compensation.

Third: In addition to battery temperature compensation, if battery temperature rises above a set temperature limit, the system stops battery charging completely by lowering the output voltage to the

“BTRM Voltage” setting. This allows the batteries to cool down.

The system also provides alarm notification of this occurrence.

Power supplied to customer equipment is not interrupted.

Fourth: The battery LVD circuits can be programmed to open

(disconnect) if a high temperature event occurs (HTD – High

Temperature Disconnect). The contactor(s) open when battery temperature rises above a programmable value and close again when battery temperature falls below another programmable value.

Intelligent Power Matching (Energy Optimization Mode)

With Energy Optimization Mode (ECO):

• The Controller monitors load current versus system capacity.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

5 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• The Controller commands some rectifiers to standby in rotation.

Refer to “Rectifier Control” on page 2 for further description.

Power Split Feature

The Power Split feature allows you to connect the power system controlled via the ACU+ to an existing DC power system instead of extending or completely replacing the existing DC power system.

The power system controlled via the ACU+ functions as a slave system to share load (split output) with the existing system

(master system) that requires expansion. The ACU+ does not require communication with the master system’s Controller.

The Power Split feature provides for the sharing of total load in a controlled manner between the paralleled power systems.

When Power Split is programmed, the ACU+ adjusts rectifier output voltage per load demands to ensure proper sharing

between the slave and master power systems. See Figure 5 .

Figure 5. Power Split Feature

Diesel Management Feature

The Diesel Management feature is available when an SM-AC supervisory module is connected to the ACU+ Controller. The

Diesel Management feature consists of a Diesel Test. The Diesel

Test can be performed at specific intervals or a User can manually start the Diesel Test. The ACU+ records the test results.

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

The PLC function allows a User to create "control program lines" by combining equipment analog signals, parameters, and alarms in a sequence that controls equipment and/or operates relays.

Control program lines are created using the WEB Interface. See

“PLC Sub-Menu” on page 145.

Refer to Table 2 for available logical components.

Supervisory Module (SM Modules) Monitoring

Various devices (supervisory modules) can be connected to the

ACU+ Controller to extend its monitoring capabilities.

Hybrid Control Function

Hybrid Control is designed for use in new installations or as an upgrade of existing sites powered by a diesel generator(s) when grid power is not available. The Hybrid Control is also applicable to sites with highly unreliable or frequently unavailable grid power connection. The primary power source is still considered to be the diesel generator(s).

Note: The Hybrid Control function requires a specific configuration.

Hybrid Control menus will not normally be displayed unless your ACU+ has been configured by Emerson for this function.

Contact Emerson for a Hybrid Control configuration.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

6 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 2. Available Logical Components

Logical Component

Logic NOT

Logic OR

Logic AND

AndOr

Greater Than (>)

Less Than (<)

Delay

Description

NOT; Returns the inverted value of the input signal/parameter.

OR; Returns active (true) if any of the two signals/parameters are active (true).

AND; Returns active (true) if both of the two signals/parameters are active (true).

XOR; Returns active (true) if one and only one of the two signals/parameters are active (true).

GREATER THAN; Returns active (true) if the analog input signal goes above the set threshold.

Returns inactive (false) if the input signal goes below the set threshold minus hysteresis value.

LESS THAN; Returns active (true) if the analog input signal goes below the set threshold.

Returns inactive (false) if the input signal goes above the set threshold plus hysteresis value.

DELAY in seconds; Delays the applied signal/parameter with the defined time in seconds before applying it to the output.

General

Hybrid Control allows the option of selecting one of the following:

Fixed Daily Time based operation or Capacity Discharge based operation.

Fixed Daily Time based operation is intended to be used with a combination of AC powered active cooling (air conditioners) and

DC powered cooling (heat exchangers, etc). The cycle period is synchronized to the 24hr day-night cycle. It makes optimum use of the different temperature conditions during the day and the night in order to facilitate Hybrid fuel saving operation.

Capacity Discharge based operation is intended for sites utilizing only DC powered cooling (heat exchangers, etc). The cycle period is determined by User selectable depth of discharge (DOD) of the batteries per cycle and associated recharge time. It provides optimum Hybrid fuel saving operation.

Operation from Grid Power is performed with both Fixed Daily

Time and Capacity Discharge modes of operation. Grid power is always given priority when available.

As the two types of control are specific to the hardware configuration of the site, the Fixed Daily Time or Capacity

Discharge is a User selectable option on installation.

Hybrid Operation

Generator Control: Potential free relay contact output from the

ACU+ interface board controls the start and stop of the diesel generator. The signal is generated by the ACU+ Controller and operates according to the Hybrid software mode of operation. The control logic is as follows:

• Energized output relay – Generator OFF.

• De-energized output relay – Generator ON.

This is a fail-safe logic to ensure generator operation in all cases where power or control to the relay is lost.

Further to that, the type of signal to the generator can be selected as N/O (Normally Open) or N/C (Normally Closed) by selecting the relevant output pins of the control relay.

Number of Generator Control Outputs: The ACU+ Hybrid software can control one or two generators. Each generator control is designated as DG1 or DG2 output. A User selectable menu will allow selecting DG1, DG2, or DG1 and DG2. When both are selected they will be alternatively used (two generator operation).

Diesel Fail Alarm: A diesel fail alarm will be generated if the Diesel

Generator ON signal fails to bring the generator to operation and provide the system with AC power. Alarm will be triggered after 60 seconds (default value, settable) from ON signal. If two generator operations are selected simultaneously with the alarm, the second

Diesel Generator ON signal will be activated.

Battery Fuse Trip Alarm: In the event of a Battery Fuse trip condition an alarm will be generated.

Under Voltage Alarms:

• Under Voltage Alarm 1: An Under Voltage Alarm 1 is set.

If voltage decreases below this setting, an alarm is raised.

• Under Voltage Alarm 2: An Under Voltage Alarm 2 is set.

If voltage decreases below this setting, the Diesel

Generator is started and an alarm is raised.

LVD 1: Normal loads are disconnected.

LVD 2: Priority loads are disconnected.

Charge Voltage: Refer to Figure 6 .

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

7 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 6. Charge Voltage voltage until end of additional equalize time and thereafter at float

voltage for the remaining time. Also see Figure 6 .

Equalize charge independently settable 0-720 min (already set in equalize charge).

Early Termination of the Discharge Periods

Equalize Charge: The battery will be recharged at equalize voltage.

This is the voltage set in the initial phase of battery recharge. See

Figure 6 .

As the voltage limit is reached, the charge current is gradually reduced – effect known as current tail. When the current tail falls below a set of threshold levels, additional equalize charge time is added.

The equalize charge current tail threshold is settable from 0.01 to

0.05. Default setting is 0.02 (2A per 100Ah). The additional equalize charge time is settable from 0 hours to 7 hours (settable in minutes from 0 to 720), default setting is 4 hours. The duration of the equalize charge is determined as the time from the start of the recharge to the end of the additional time. (Maximum charge time, determined from the time charge starts, is settable in the range of 5-24h.)

The end of recharge is determined by a three (3) step approach:

Step1 - calculated battery capacity exceeds 90%. Calculation is performed by measurement of battery current and time, in

Ah.

Step 2 - charge current tail threshold is reached.

Step 3 - additional charge time is added.

Float Charge: Default float voltage is 54.0V at 20°C with a temperature compensation of -72mV per °C.

If battery temperature exceeds 38°C, the charge voltage is reduced to 51V to reduce gassing and prevent thermal runaway. The same is applicable as well for equalizing charge.

Equalizing Charge: As the cyclic use does not ensure complete battery recharge after every cycle, an equalizing charge cycle is added. The equalizing cycle will occur up to four times a month, settable for every 7 to 60 days intervals. Start date and time is settable. Equalizing charge time is 20 hours independent of discharge time setting. Equalizing charge is performed at equalize

During discharge, over temperature and under voltage conditions will interrupt the discharge and change the operation to charge –

Diesel Generator ON.

Over Temperature: The diesel generator will start and run for a period before it is stopped again. The run time is User selectable in the range 30 to 120 minutes, default setting is 60 minutes.

Temperature is referenced to cabinet/shelter ambient temperature sensor connected to the Controller, not battery temperature. Over temperature start can be disabled completely from User settings menu.

Under Voltage: The under voltage start is triggered by under voltage alarm 2 voltage settings.

The diesel generator will start and run until the normal recharge cycle is due to finish depending on selected mode of operation.

Example for Fixed Daily Time: If the normal recharge cycle is from

7am until 7pm and under voltage has started the diesel generator at 5:30am, the effective recharge will be from 5:30am until 7pm.

Example for Capacity Discharge: If this mode is selected, the recharge will terminate.

Operation with Grid Power

Grid power is always prioritized when available. If grid power becomes available during battery discharge, the discharge cycle is terminated and recharge cycle is initiated. If grid power becomes available during diesel generator operation, the diesel generator is switched OFF and operations continue on grid power.

Battery Recharge with Grid Power: Battery recharge with grid power can start from the beginning (case of grid power becoming available during battery discharge) or can continue over from diesel generator recharge depending on the timing. In both cases, the recharge process will follow the recharge profile shown in

Figure 6 . If battery becomes fully recharged and grid power is still

present, the operations will continue to be powered from grid and no battery discharge will be initiated for the duration of grid availability. In this case battery voltage will revert back to Float voltage.

Battery Discharge after Grid Failure: At the point of grid power failure, the battery capacity is unknown as these events occur in random manner. For the purpose of maximizing the use of grid power and in anticipation of grid power becoming available again,

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

8 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014) the Hybrid operation will continue with battery discharge cycle.

Discharge will continue until:

• The preset discharge time elapses (Fixed Daily Time).

• The preset DOD is reached (Capacity Discharge).

In both cases, the discharge can be terminated earlier as described in “Early Termination of the Discharge Periods”.

Relay Assignment – when in Hybrid Mode

Relay 1: Generator Alarm

• No Generator Voltage Alarm. No AC supply, 60 sec delay.

Relay 2: Battery Alarms

• Logic alarm generated from: under voltage 1, under voltage 2, LVD1, LVD2, battery high temp, battery very

In this mode of operation the total duration of a complete cycle is

24hr. Such duration is necessary as the operation is synchronized with day-night temperature pattern. When an extended recharge cycle is required, the termination of it will still follow the 24hr schedule. high temp, overvoltage 1, overvoltage 2, battery temp sensor fail, battery fuse alarms, and high load alarm.

Relay 3: Rectifier Alarms

• Logic alarm generated from: multiple rectifier fail, rectifier fail, rectifier fan failure, rectifier HVSD, rectifier

AC failure, and rectifier not responding.

Relay 4: System Alarms

• Logic alarm generated from: load fuse alarms, high ambient temperature, ambient temp sensor fail, smoke detected, and water detection.

Relay 5: Generator Run At High Temp

• Output to intelligent cooling devices linked to AC supply

(DG run).

Relay 6: Intruder Alarm

• Alarm triggered by dry contact door/motion sensor.

Relay 7: Diesel 1 in Operation

• Output to DG1 on site. DG is set on for the duration of the signal.

Relay 8: Diesel 2 in Operation

• Output to DG2 on site. DG is set on for the duration of the signal.

Fixed Daily

Cycle Duration: A complete cycle consists of discharge and charge periods to the combined total of 24hrs. The discharge period starts at 7pm. It is then followed by recharge period (Diesel Generator

ON) for the remaining of the 24hrs. The discharge time is User selectable in the range 1hrs to 22hrs, default setting is 12hrs.

Discharge: The discharge start time and duration are settable.

Discharge period starts at 7pm. The discharge time is User selectable in the range 1hrs to 22hrs, default setting is 12hrs.

Recharge: Recharge period (Diesel Generator ON) follows after discharge for the remaining of the 24hrs. Recharge is performed at equalize voltage until added equalize time elapses and at float voltage for the remaining charge time.

High Load Alarm: In order to identify conditions where the load requirements are exceeding the dimensioning of the Hybrid site, an alarm must be generated. The alarm will be triggered upon exceeding the maximum capacity per discharge cycle. The threshold value will be set as default to 40% of battery capacity. It will require capacity measurement per cycle. The alarm will be set once the high load threshold value is reached and is reset at the beginning of the next discharge period. This alarm will also allow distinguishing the root cause of under voltage conditions: is it high load demand or is it a battery ageing and associated loss of capacity issue or insufficient charge capacity.

Capacity Discharge

The cycle period is determined by User selectable capacity discharge of the batteries and associated recharge times. After that the cycle repeats itself. It does not follow a 24hr pattern.

Capacity Discharge and Recharge: The battery discharge period is determined by the percentage of the nominal battery capacity

[Ah] that will be discharged per cycle.

The depth of discharge [DOD] per cycle is User selectable in the range 20% to 80%. Default setting is 60%. The value is set as battery capacity at the end of each discharge period. Therefore, if a

60% discharge is chosen, the discharge value is set to 40%.

The time to recharge to full battery capacity depends on battery capacity at the start of the charge cycle and available recharge current.

When the additional charge time has been reached; the generator will be stopped, the recharge cycle will end, and discharge cycle will be initiated.

For practical purposes, the battery capacity at the end of every recharge period is set to 100% as long as Step1, Step 2, and Step 3 have elapsed.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

9 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

If end of charge is not reached within the set maximum hrs, the recharge will be terminated anyway and discharge cycle will be initiated.

Maximum Current Limit Function

The current available from the rectifiers can be programmed (in

AMPS) from 10% to 121% of combined rectifier capacity. The factory setting is 121% unless otherwise specified. The current available from the converters can be programmed (in AMPS) from

50% to 116% of combined converter capacity. The factory setting is

116% unless otherwise specified. Refer to the ACU+ Configuration

Drawing (C-drawing) supplied with your system documentation for your system’s settings.

If a rectifier or converter is added, the respective current limit point will automatically increase by the percentage each existing rectifier or converter was set to provide prior to the addition.

If a rectifier or converter is removed from the system (and the Rect

Comm Fail or Conv Comm Fail alarm is reset), the respective current limit point will remain unchanged unless the capacity of the remaining rectifiers or converters is not sufficient to maintain the present current limit point. If that happens, the current limit point will automatically increase to the maximum (121% of the remaining rectifiers or 116% of the remaining converters).

When setting total rectifier or total converter current limit, the set point to each unit is the total set point divided by the number of units. For example, if the system contains five rectifiers and the current limit is set to 150 amps then each rectifier has a current limit set point of 30 amps. If one or more rectifiers or converters are removed or fail it will take several seconds for the individual set points to the remaining rectifiers or converters to be reset. In the example given, if one rectifier is removed the current limit set point will drop to 120 amps (30 amps times four remaining rectifiers) until the controller can send updated set points to the remaining rectifiers. This takes a couple communication cycles

(several seconds) after which each rectifier would have a new set point of 37.5 amps for a total of 150 amps. The total current limit of the rectifiers and converters should not be set such that the loss of the redundant rectifiers or converters will cause this temporary set point to drop below the actual maximum expected load. If batteries are used on the rectifier output, the batteries should support the load until the current limit set points can be reestablished due to loss of a rectifier.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

10 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Operation

Local Indicators

Location and Identification: Refer to Figure 7 .

Description: There are three (3) indicators located on the ACU+ Controller’s front panel. Refer to Table 3 for the function of the

indicators.

Figure 7. Local Indicators and Menu Navigation Keys Locations

M820B M820D

Minor Alarm

Indicator (Yellow)

Status

Indicator

(Green)

Critical or Major

Alarm Indicator

(Red)

USB

Port

Menu

Navigation

Keys

10/100M Ethernet

Port (RJ-45)

Critical or Major

Alarm Indicator

(Red)

Minor Alarm

Indicator (Yellow)

Status

Indicator

(Green)

10/100M Ethernet

Port (RJ-45)

USB

Port

ESC ENT

Menu Navigation Keys

Table 3. Local Indicators

Indicator Normal State Fault State Fault Cause

Status

(Green)

Minor

Alarm

(Yellow)

Critical/Major

Alarm (Red)

On

Off

Off

Off

On

On

No input power to the ACU+ Controller.

The system has one or more active Minor alarms. Alarm conditions are programmable.

The system has one or more active Critical or

Major alarms. Alarm conditions are programmable.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

11 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Passwords and Access Levels

• Users (for local and Web access to the ACU+ Controller) are set via the Web Interface.

Note that anyone can browse the ACU+ via the local keypad and display. A password is required to change settings.

Web access always requires a User Name and password to be entered to gain access.

• Users are configured with a User Name, password, and access level.

User Name: Maximum 13 Characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, _ ).

Password: Maximum 13 Characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, _ ).

Once a password is entered, it remains in effect for a preset time period to allow navigating between menus without re-entering the password.

Access Level: Refer to the following table.

A User has access to his/her level menus, plus all menus of the lesser access levels.

Access Level

(Authority Level)

Level A (Browser)

Level B (Operator)

Level C (Engineer)

Level D (Administrator)

Default User Name and Password none set none set none set admin, 1

Authority

The User can only read (browse) information in the menus.

The User has access to the system "Control" menus and the

“Operating State” (Auto/Manual).

The User has access to the system "Setting" menus and can download the configuration package.

The User has full access to all menus; including update the OS application and modifying, adding, and deleting Users.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

12 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Local Keypad and Display Access

Local Menu Navigation Keys and LCD Display

Location and Identification: Refer to Figure 7 .

Description: There are four (4) menu navigation keys and an LCD display located on the ACU+ Controller’s front panel. Refer to Table 4 for

the function of the menu navigation keys.

Note: When the LCD is lit, if no button is pushed for 8 minutes, the backlight of the LCD display extinguishes and the ACU+ Controller returns to the Main Screen. Press any key to re-activate the LCD display.

Table 4. Local Menu Navigation Keys

Key Symbol Key Name Function

ESC Escape

Press this key to go back to a previous menu or to cancel setting a parameter.

ENT Enter

Press this key to go forward to the next menu, to select a parameter to edit, or to validate a parameter setting change.

Up

Down

Press

or

to scroll through the menus or to change the value of a parameter.

Press any key to silence an audible alarm.

Local Display Menus

Press ESC and ENT together to reset the

ACU+ Controller, then press ENT to accept or ESC to cancel.

Refer to “Local Display Menus” on page 75.

Note: A valid password is required to access menus that allow changing any power system parameter.

Navigating the Menus

--

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press the up or down arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the list of sub-menus in the menu screen (selects the sub-menu), then press ENT to enter the selected sub-menu.

To Enter a Password:

If a password screen opens, a password must be entered to allow the User to make adjustments. To enter a password, with the cursor at the User Name field (default is “Admin”), press the down arrow key to move cursor down to the password line. Press ENT. “0” is highlighted. Press the up arrow key once to change the “0” to”1” (default password is “1”), then press ENT twice. ( Note: If you have been

assigned a unique User Name and password, follow this procedure to enter these.)

To Change a Parameter:

Press the up or down arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the list of parameters in the menu screen (selects the parameter to change), then press ENT to change the selected parameter. The parameter field highlights. Press the up or down arrow keys to change the parameter value. Press ENT to confirm the change.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

13 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

WEB Interface Access

Note: The ACU+ supports a 10/100M Ethernet connection.

Overview

Via the WEB Interface, a User (with proper access level) can:

• View real-time operating information (rectifiers, converters, AC, DC, Batteries, etc.).

• View and download information recorded in logs.

• Send control commands.

• Set programmable parameters.

• Download and upload configuration package.

• Download firmware to the Controller.

Setting IP Communications Parameters

The Controller’s IP parameters (IP, subnet mask, and gateway addresses) must be set to match your company’s network settings. The default settings for these parameters are shown below.

• IP Address: 192.168.1.2

• Subnet Mask Address: 255.255.255.0

• Gateway Address: 192.168.1.1

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Communication / enter parameters.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / Network Configuration / enter parameters.

WEB Interface Menus

Refer to “WEB Interface Menus” on page 102.

Connecting to the Controller (over a network connection)

Refer to Logging into the Controller on page 17.

Connecting the Controller Directly to your Computer

Before connecting your computer directly to the Controller’s

Ethernet Port, record your current network settings as outlined below, then change these settings to match the communications settings programmed in the Controller.

PROCEDURE

1.

Record your computer’s network settings by launching

Control Panel in your computer. Navigate through

Network Connections  Local Area Connection 

Properties  Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)  Properties.

2.

Record whether the "Obtain an IP address automatically" or "Use the following IP address" button is selected. If "Use the following IP address" button is selected, also record the following:

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

3.

Record your Controller’s network settings by navigating the Controller’s local display panel to Main Menu 

Settings  Communication .

4.

Record the following information:

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

Example:

IP Address: 192.168.1.2

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1

5.

Change your local computer’s network settings using the information you acquired in Step 4), except that the last part of the IP address needs to be replaced with any different number.

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

Example:

IP Address: 192.168.1.3

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1

6.

Select OK . Note that you may have to reboot your local computer for the settings to take effect. Follow any instruction you see on the screen.

Disabling Proxy Server Settings to Enable a Connection to the

Controller over an Intranet Network (if required)

Note: This procedure needs to be performed only when the

Controller is connected to an Intranet and the User’s computer is set to access the Intranet through a proxy server. Note that if the Controller is connected to the Internet and the User’s computer is connected to an Intranet, the User may not be able to disable the proxy server and access the Controller.

If the Controller’s Ethernet Port is connected to your company’s

Intranet Network and your computer is also connected to the

Intranet Network but requires access via a proxy server, you must disable the proxy server settings to access the Controller. Follow the procedure below to disable the proxy server settings.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

14 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

PROCEDURE

1.

Launch “Internet Explorer”.

2.

Select Internet Options from the Tools menu. The

“Internet Options” window opens. In the “Internet

Options” window, select the Connections Tab.

PROCEDURE

1.

Launch “Internet Explorer”.

2.

Select Internet Options from the Tools menu. The

“Internet Options” window opens. In the “Internet

Options” window, select the General Tab.

3.

Click on the LAN Settings...

button. The following window opens. In the LAN Settings window, uncheck the Proxy

Server box and click OK .

3.

Click on the Settings button. The following window opens. In the Settings window, choose “ Every time I visit the webpage ” and click OK .

Internet Security Settings for Loading Files or Downloading Files into the ACU+

Your computer’s security settings may prevent you from loading files or downloading files into the ACU+. Refer to the following procedure to set your computer’s security settings to allow for this.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

15 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

4.

In the “Internet Options” window, select the Security tab. 6.

In the Trusted sites window,type or copy the ACU+ URL in the “ Add this website to the zone: ” box.

5.

Click on

Trusted sites . With “ Trusted sites ” selected, click

Sites ”. The following window opens. Uncheck the

“Require server verification (https:) for all sites in the zone:” box.

7.

Click

Click

Add . The ACU+ URL is listed in the Websites : box.

Close .

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

16 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Logging into the Controller

PROCEDURE

1.

Internet Explorer, version 5.5 or newer, is required. It is best to view the WEB Interface at 1024 x 768 resolution. In newer versions of Internet Explorer, you may need to turn Compatibility View On (Tools Menu / Compatibility View).

2.

In Internet Explorer, enter the IP address programmed into the Controller and press opens. Enter a valid User Name and Password then click LOGIN .

ENTER . The following WEB Interface window

Note: By default, the “User Name” is "admin" and the “Password” is “1”.

3.

After entering a valid

Menus” on page 102.

User Name and Password and clicking LOGIN

, the "HOMEPAGE" window opens. Refer to “WEB Interface

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

17 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Common Tasks Performed via the

Local Keypad and/or Web Interface

Note: Ensure current configuration is backed up prior to changing

settings (see Backing Up the ACU+ Configuration on page 26).

Create new backup files after every successful update for your records and in case of controller failure.

Refer also to “Local Display Menus” on page 75 and “WEB Interface

Menus” on page 102.

Procedures

Changing the Local LCD Display Contrast

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / Time Sync.

See “Time Sync Sub-Menu” on page 137.

Setting IP Communications Parameters

See also Setting IP Communications Parameters on page 14.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Communication / enter parameters.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / Network Configuration / enter parameters.

Viewing/Changing the Float Voltage Setting

Local Menu Navigation:

To change the contrast of the LCD display, from the Main Screen, press and hold the Up Arrow (for increasing) or Down Arrow (for decreasing) then press and hold ENT until contrast is as desired.

Release both buttons.

WEB Menu Navigation: none.

Disabling the Local Keypad Sound

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Controller / Keypad Voice.

To disable the keypad sound, set "Keypad Voice" to "Off".

WEB Menu Navigation: none.

Changing the Date

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Charge / Float Voltage. or

Main Menu / Quick Setting / “FLT/EQ” Voltag / Float Voltage.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab / Float Charge

Voltage. or

Quick Settings / “Float/Equalize” Charge Voltage.

Viewing/Changing the Equalize Voltage Setting

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Controller / Date.

After selecting Date (by pressing ENT when the cursor is in the Date field), use  and  to select the year then press ENT , next use  and  to select the month then press ENT , and finally use  and

 to select the day then press ENT .

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / Time Sync.

Changing the Time

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Charge / EQ Voltage. or

Main Menu / Quick Setting / “FLT/EQ” Voltag / EQ Voltage.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab / Equalize

Charge Voltage. or

Quick Settings / “Float/Equalize” Charge Voltage.

Setting Battery Parameters

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Controller / Time.

After selecting Time (by pressing ENT when the cursor is in the

Time field), use  and  to select the hour then press ENT , next use  and  to select the minute then press ENT , and finally use  and  to select the second then press ENT .

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Battery # / enter parameters.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Battery # / select the Settings

Tab and enter parameters.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

18 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Setting Battery Capacity Parameters

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Battery # / Rated Capacity.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Battery # / select the Settings

Tab and enter the Battery Rating parameter.

Setting Temperature Sensors

Temperature sensors may be connected to the…

• Temp1 and Temp2 ports on an IB2 Interface Board,

• Temp1 and Temp2 ports on an EIB Interface Board, and

• Temp1 through Temp8 ports of up to eight (8) SM-Temp modules.

Each port (sensor) may be set as None, Battery, or Ambient.

A temperature sensor set as an ambient temperature sensor may also be set as the sensor which displays the ambient temperature on the Web Interface’s Homepage.

A temperature sensor set as a battery temperature sensor may also be set as the temperature compensation sensor (in addition, the temperature compensation sensor is the sensor which displays the battery temperature on the Web Interface’s Homepage).

A temperature sensor set as a battery temperature sensor may also be set as the BTRM (Battery Thermal Runaway Management) sensor (in addition, the BTRM sensor is the sensor which is used for the High Temperature Disconnect [HTD] Feature.)

• First, set each temperature sensor in the system to None,

Battery, or Ambient.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / IB2

Temp#.

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / EIB

Temp#.

Main Menu / Settings / SMTemp / SMTemp # / T# Assign

Equip.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / IB2

Temp #.

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / EIB

Temp #.

Device Information / SM Temp Group / SM Temp # /

Settings Tab / Temperature# Assign Equipment.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

19

Note: Also set High2, High1, and Low temperature alarms for each temperature sensor (from the Web

Interface). Note that you cannot set high and low temperature alarms for individual temperature sensors from the Local Menus. High and low temperature alarm settings for the temperature sensors set as ambient are found in the Device

Information / Power System / Settings tab. High and low temperature alarm settings for the probes set as battery are found in the Device Information / Battery

Group / Settings tab.

• Second, if desired, set a temperature sensor set as an ambient temperature sensor as the sensor which displays the ambient temperature on the Web Interface’s

Homepage. Then set High2, High1, and Low ambient temperature alarms (from the same menu).

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / Amb Temp

Sensor.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab /

Ambient Temp Sensor.

• Third, if desired, set a temperature sensor set as a battery temperature sensor as the battery temperature compensation sensor. Then set High2, High1, and Low compensation temperature alarms (from the same menu).

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Temp Comp /

TempComp Sensor.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab / Temp

Compensation Probe Number.

• Fourth, if desired, set a temperature sensor set as a battery temperature sensor as the BTRM sensor. Then set

High2 and High1 BTRM temperature alarms (from the same menu). If battery temperature exceeds the “BTRM

Temp High2” setting, system voltage is lowered to the

BTRM voltage setting (set from the same menu). Note, you must first enable this feature (from the same menu).

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Basic / BTRM

TempSensor.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab / BTRM

Temp Sensor.

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Setting Battery Charge Temperature Compensation Setting Over Voltage Alarm 1

The following need to be set for the Battery Charge Temperature

Compensation feature.

See above for selecting the battery temperature compensation temperature sensor; or select maximum, average, or Average

SMBRC.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Temp Comp.

Enter values for the following parameters:

Temp CompCenter, Temp Comp Coeff, TempComp Sensor, Comp

Temp High2, Comp Temp High1, Comp Temp Low, Temp Comp

Max V, Temp Comp Clamp, and Temp Comp Min V (note that you have to enable Temp Comp Clamp to set the Temp Comp Max V and Min V values).

WEB Menu Navigation:

Quick Settings / Temp Compensation Setting.

Enter values for the following parameters:

Temperature Compensation Center, Temp Comp Coefficient

(slope), Temp Compensation Probe Number, Comp Temp High2,

Comp Temp High1, Comp Temp Low, Temp Comp Voltage Clamp,

Temp Comp Max Voltage, and Temp Comp Min Voltage (note that you have to enable Temp Comp Clamp to set the Temp Comp Max

V and Min V values).

Setting Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Over Voltage 1.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System Group / Settings Tab / Over

Voltage 1.

Setting Over Voltage Alarm 2

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Over Voltage 2

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System Group / Settings Tab / Over

Voltage 2.

Setting Under Voltage Alarm 1

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Under Voltage 1.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System Group / Settings Tab / Under

Voltage 1.

Setting Under Voltage Alarm 2

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Rectifier / All Rect Set / HVSD (enabled), then

Main Menu / Settings / Rectifier / All Rect Set / HVSD Limit

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Rectifier Group / Settings Tab / HVSD

(enabled), then

Device Information / Rectifier Group / Settings Tab / HVSD Limit.

Setting Rectifier Current Limit

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Under Voltage 2.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System Group / Settings Tab / Over

Voltage 2.

Configuring the ACU+ Identification of Rectifiers and

Assigning which Input Phase is Connected to the Rectifiers

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Rectifier / All Rect Set / Current Limit

(enabled), then

Main Menu / Settings / Rectifier / All Rect Set / Current Limit Pt

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Rectifier Group / Settings Tab / Current Limit

(enabled), then

Device Information / Rectifier Group / Settings Tab / Current Limit

Point.

When rectifiers are all installed prior to applying power and starting the system, the order in which the ACU+ identifies the rectifiers is by serial number (lowest serial number is Rect 1, next lowest is Rect 2, etc.). If you prefer the ACU+ to identify the rectifiers by position in the system, perform the following procedure.

Upon power up, the ACU+ arbitrarily assigns Phase A, B, or C to each rectifier. This assignment is used to display rectifier AC input phase voltage(s). The User may reassign the phase to each rectifier per your specific installation by following the procedure below.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

20 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Rectifier / Rect #1 / Rectifier ID and Rect

Phase.

(repeat for every rectifier) then

Main Menu / Manual / Rectifier / All Rect Ctrl / Confirm ID/PH.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Rectifier Group / Rectifier #1 / Settings Tab /

Rectifier ID and Rectifier Phase.

(repeat for every rectifier) then

Device Information / Rectifier Group / Control Tab / Confirm

Rectifier “ID/Phase”.

LOCAL PROCEDURE

1.

With the Main screen displayed, press ENT to go to the

Main Menu. Navigate to and select “Settings” (ENT).

2.

If a password screen opens, a password must be entered to allow the User to make adjustments. If a password was previously entered and has not yet timed out, skip this step and proceed to step 3). Otherwise, to enter a password, with the cursor at the User Name field (default is “Admin”), press the down arrow key to move cursor down to the password line. Press ENT. “0” is highlighted.

Press the up arrow key once to change the “0” to”1”

(default password is “1”), then press ENT twice. ( Note: If you have been assigned a unique User Name and password,

follow this procedure to enter these.)

3.

With the Settings menu screen displayed, navigate to and select “Rectifier” (ENT).

4.

Navigate to “Rect #” (# is used here to represent the rectifier identification number). Press ENT. The rectifier

# menu screen is displayed, and the green LED on one rectifier starts flashing. This is the rectifier currently identified by the ACU+ as rectifier #. (If this is not the rectifier you want, press ESC to return to rectifier menu screen and select a different rectifier.)

5.

If you wish to change the Rectifier IDs, navigate to and select “Rectifier ID”. Press ENT. Use the up or down keys to change the ACU+ identification number for the flashing rectifier. Press ENT.

6.

If you wish to change the Rectifier Phase Assignment, navigate to and select “Rect Phase”. Press ENT. Use the up or down keys to change the phase connected to the flashing rectifier. Press ENT.

7.

Press ESC to return to rectifier menu screen.

8.

Navigate to and select the next rectifier.

9.

Repeat steps 4) through 8) for each of the remaining rectifiers in the system.

10.

When you have finished selecting identification numbers and phases for all rectifiers, repeatedly press ESC to return to the Main Menu.

11.

Navigate to and select “Manual” (ENT) / “Rectifier” (ENT)

/ “All Rect Ctrl” (ENT).

12.

Navigate to “Confirm ID/PH”. Press ENT. “Yes” highlights.

13.

Press ENT to select the operation. Press ENT again to confirm.

Note: Check you numbering to be sure it is correct. If there were conflicts in your numbering, rectifiers with conflicts will be assigned the next available sequential number.

14.

Return to the Main screen by repeatedly pressing ESC

(escape).

Configuring the ACU+ Identification of Converters

When converters are all installed prior to applying power and starting the system, the order in which the ACU+ identifies the converters is by serial number (lowest serial number is Conv 1, next lowest is Conv 2, etc.).

If you prefer the ACU+ to identify the converters by position in the system, perform the following procedure.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Converter / Conv #1 / Set Conv ID.

(repeat for every converter) then

Main Menu / Manual / Converter / All Conv Ctrl / Confirm ID.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Converter Group / Converter #1 / Settings

Tab / Set Converter ID.

(repeat for every converter) then

Device Information / Converter Group / Control Tab / Confirm

Converters ID.

LOCAL PROCEDURE

1.

With the Main screen displayed, press ENT to go to the

Main Menu. Navigate to and select “Settings” (ENT).

2.

If a password screen opens, a password must be entered to allow the User to make adjustments. If a password was previously entered and has not yet timed out, skip this step and proceed to step 3). Otherwise, to enter a

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

21 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014) password, with the cursor at the User Name field (default is “Admin”), press the down arrow key to move cursor down to the password line. Press ENT. “0” is highlighted.

Press the up arrow key once to change the “0” to”1”

(default password is “1”), then press ENT twice. ( Note: If you have been assigned a unique User Name and password,

follow this procedure to enter these.)

3.

With the Settings menu screen displayed, navigate to and select “Converter” (ENT).

4.

Navigate to “Conv #” (# is used here to represent the converter identification number). Press ENT. The converter # menu screen is displayed, and the green LED on one converter starts flashing. This is the converter currently identified by the ACU+ as converter #. (If this is not the converter you want, press ESC to return to converter menu screen and select a different converter.)

5.

Navigate to and select “Set Conv ID”. Press ENT. Use the up or down keys to change the ACU+ identification number for the flashing converter. Press ENT.

6.

Press ESC to return to converter menu screen.

7.

Navigate to and select the next converter.

8.

Repeat steps 4) through 7) for each of the remaining converters in the system.

9.

When you have finished selecting identification numbers for all converters, repeatedly press ESC to return to the

Main Menu.

10.

Navigate to and select “Manual” (ENT) / “Converter”

(ENT) / “All Conv Ctrl” (ENT).

11.

Navigate to “Confirm ID”. Press ENT. “Yes” highlights.

12.

Press ENT to select the operation. Press ENT again to confirm.

Note: Check you numbering to be sure it is correct. If there where conflicts in your numbering, converters with conflicts will be assigned the next available sequential number.

13.

Return to the Main screen by repeatedly pressing ESC

(escape).

Setting Digital Inputs

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / DI[number] Alarm

State.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / DI[number]

Alarm State.

Setting Battery Block and Battery Midpoint Monitoring (if equipped with an EIB Assembly)

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / EIB / EIB 1 / enter the following parameters.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / EIB Group / EIB 1 / select the Settings Tab and enter the following parameters.

Parameters

• Voltage Type

• Blk V Diff(12V) or Blk V Diff(Mid)

• Block In-Use

Setting External Shunts (connected to the EIB Assembly)

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / EIB / EIB1 / enter the following parameters.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / EIB Group / EIB 1 / select the Settings Tab and enter the following parameters.

Parameters

• Shunt # Set As (Not Used, General, Load, Battery) a.

Not Used: Indicates this shunt input is not used. b.

General: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and will not be added to Total DC

Load or Total Battery Load. c.

Load: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and added to the Total DC Load. d.

Battery: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and added to the Total Battery Load and used with Battery Management.

• Shunt # Current

• Shunt # Voltage

Setting External Shunts (connected to the SM-DU+ Assembly)

Local Menu Navigation: none.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

22 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / SMDUP Group / SMDUP 1 / select the Settings

Tab and enter the following parameters.

Parameters

• Current1 Break Value (A) (Device rating.)

• Current1 High Current Limit (% of Current# Break Value.)

• Current1 Very High Current Limit (% of Current# Break

Value.)

• Shunt # Current (Rating of Shunt.)

• Shunt # Voltage (Rating of Shunt.)

Setting the Load Current Alarm

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Load Curr Alarm.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / Load Current

Alarm.

Enter a value (in AMPS). If load current exceeds this value, a load current alarm is issued.

Using the Relay Test Feature

Note: The relay test can only be performed when no alarms are present.

Automatic Test

When placed in Relay Automatic Test Mode, all relays on the IB2 board deenergize (when set for Fail Safe), then one-by-one each relay energizes for the time period selected and then deenergizes.

If the system is equipped with an EIB board, after the IB2 relays are tested, one-by-one each relay on the EIB board deenergizes for the time period selected and then re-energizes. At the end of the test, all relays are returned to their normal state (if no alarms are present).

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / set the Relay Test

Time. then

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Relay Test / set to

Automatic.

Note: The relay test can be exited at any time by setting the Relay

Test to Disabled.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / set the Relay

Test Time. then

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / Relay Test / set to Automatic.

Note: The relay test can be exited at any time by setting the Relay

Test to Disabled.

Individual Test

When placed in Relay Individual Test Mode, relays can be tested

individually. This is the same procedure as “Manually Forcing

Relays” on page 26 except you do not place the Controller in

Manual Mode.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Relay Test / set to

Individual. then

Main Menu / Manual / Power System / Relay Output [number]

(individually you can set the state of the relays on the IB2 Board).

Main Menu / Manual / EIB / EIB1 / Relay Output [number]

(individually you can set the state of the relays on the EIB Board).

• Select the other state for an alarm relay (active / not active).

• After confirming the change, the alarm relay will momentarily toggle to the chosen state. The alarm relay then reverts back to being controlled by the ACU+.

• When done, set “Relay Test” to “Disabled”. Note that if there is no User interaction for 10 minutes, the Relay Test will automatically revert to the “disabled” state.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / Relay Test / set to Individual. then

Device Information / Power System / Control Tab (individually you can set the state of the relays on the IB2 Board).

Device Information / EIB Group / EIB 1 / Control Tab (individually you can set the state of the relays on the EIB Board).

The Control Tab allows you to change the state of an alarm relay.

• In the "Set value" box, select the other state for an alarm relay (active / not active).

• Click on "set".

• After confirming the change, the alarm relay will momentarily toggle to the chosen state. The alarm relay then reverts back to being controlled by the ACU+.

• When done, set “Relay Test” to “Disabled”.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

23 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Programming the Audible Alarm Feature

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alarm Param / Alarm Voice.

Set "Alarm Voice" to:

• On: When a new alarm occurs, the audible alarm sounds.

Press any key to silence the audible alarm.

WEB Menu Navigation: none.

Adding, Deleting, and Modifying Users

Note:

• Off: Disables the audible alarm.

• 3 minutes / 10 minutes / 1 hour / 4 hours: When a new alarm occurs, the audible alarm sounds. The audible alarm automatically silences after the selected time period.

Only relay names and digital input names are recommended to be changed for troubleshooting purposes.

Local Menu Navigation: none.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Configuration / Equipment Info Modification.

Configuration / Signal Information Modification.

Viewing Alarms

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Status / Active Alarms.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Active alarms are listed in the lower right window pane. If the window pane is collapsed, click the "arrow" icon to expand the alarm list.

Clearing Rectifier Lost, Rectifier Communication Fail,

Converter Lost, Converter Communication Fail, and All

Converter Comm Fail Alarms

Local Menu Navigation: none.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Refer to “User Information Settings Sub-Menu” on page 129.

Assigning Severity Level to Alarms

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alm Severity.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Configuration / Signal Information Modification / select entry from

“Query Device Type” list / select “Alarm Signal” from “Signal Type” list / select entry from “New Level” list / press “Set”.

Assigning Relays to Alarms

Navigate to the menus to clear the respective alarm as indicated below.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Rectifier / All Rect Ctrl.

Main Menu / Manual / Converter / All Conv Ctrl.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Rectifier Group / Control Tab.

Device Information / Converter Group / Control Tab.

Clearing SMTemp Lost and SMTemp Probe Alarms

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alarm Relay.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Configuration / Alarm Relays / select entry from “Standard

Equipment” list / select entry from “New Relay Number” list / press

“Modify”.

Changing the Names of Items Displayed in the LCD and Web-

Interface Menus

Navigate to the menus to clear the respective alarm as indicated below.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / SMTemp / SMTemp Group.

Main Menu / Manual / SMTemp / SMTemp #.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / SM Temp Group / Control Tab.

Device Information / SM Temp Group / SM Temp # / Control Tab.

Clearing Battery Alarms

Navigate to the menus to clear the respective alarm as indicated below.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Batt Group.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

24 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Control Tab.

Clearing Logs

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alarm Param / Clr Alm Hist.

The only selection for "Clr Alm Hist" is Yes. Once Yes is selected and confirmed, the alarm history log is cleared.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / Clear Data.

Select which log to clear (“Alarm History”, “Data History”, “Control

Command Log”, “Battery Test Log”, “System Runtime Log”, or

“Diesel Test Log”). Select “Clear”.

Clearing the Maintenance Alarm

A maintenance time can be set which, once expires, issues a maintenance alarm. When the maintenance alarm is issued, perform the routine maintenance and reset the maintenance timer. To reset the maintenance timer and clear the Maintenance

Alarm, clear the Maintenance Run Time.

Local Menu Navigation:

Place Controller in Manual Mode, then Main Menu / Manual /

Power System / Clr MtncRunTime.

The only selection for "Clr MtncRunTime" is Yes. Once Yes is selected and confirmed, the maintenance timer is reset and the maintenance alarm is cleared.

Place Controller back to Auto mode.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Quick Settings / “Auto/Manual” Setting / change to Manual. then

Device Information / Power System / select the Control Tab and clear the maintenance timer. then

Quick Settings / “Auto/Manual” Setting / change to Auto.

Viewing the ACU+ Controller’s Device Inventory

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Status / Sys Inventory.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / System Inventory.

Updating the ACU+ Controller’s Device Inventory

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Controller / Auto Config.

The only selection for "Auto Config" is Yes. Once Yes is selected and confirmed, the ACU+ Controller will auto-configure for the devices connected to it.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Configuration / Auto Configuration.

Blocking Alarms

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alarm Param / Block Alarm. or

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Alarm Blocked.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab / Outgoing

Alarms Blocked.

Set to:

• Normal: Alarms are processed normally.

• Blocked: Forces the alarm relays in the "off" state and blocks alarms from changing the relay state.

Setting Auto Equalize

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Charge / Auto EQ / once enabled, additional parameters appear. or

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Charge / Cyc EQ / once enabled, additional parameters appear. or

Main Menu / Quick Setting / “FLT/EQ” Set.

Also set “Maximum EQ Time” in same menu.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab / Automatic

Equalize. Once Automatic Equalize is enabled, additional parameters appear. or

Device Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab / Cyclic Equalize.

Once Cyclic Equalize is enabled, additional parameters appear. or

Quick Settings / “Float/Equalize” Settings / once Automatic

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

25 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Equalize and/or Cyclic Equalize is enabled, additional parameters appear.

Also set “Maximum Equalize Charge Time” in same menu.

Placing the System in Float or Equalize Charge Mode

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Batt Group / “EQ/FLT Control”.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Battery Group / Control Tab / “Equalize/Float”

Charge Control.

Manually Forcing Relays

• After confirming the change, the LVD will momentarily toggle to the chosen state. The LVD then reverts back to being controlled by the ACU+.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / LVD Group / LVD Unit / select the Control

Tab.

The Control Tab allows you to change the state of an LVD.

• In the "Set value" box, select the other state for an LVD

(connected/disconnected).

• Click on "set".

• After confirming the change, the LVD will momentarily toggle to the chosen state. The LVD then reverts back to being controlled by the ACU+.

Backing Up the ACU+ Configuration

See also “Using the Relay Test Feature” on page 23.

Place Controller in Manual Mode, then...

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Power System / Relay Output [number].

Main Menu / Manual / EIB / EIB1 / Relay Output [number].

• Select the other state for an alarm relay (active / not active).

• After confirming the change, the alarm relay will momentarily toggle to the chosen state. The alarm relay then reverts back to being controlled by the ACU+.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Device Information / Power System / Control Tab.

Device Information / EIB Group / EIB1 / Control Tab.

The Control Tab allows you to change the state of an alarm relay.

• In the "Set value" box, select the other state for an alarm relay (active / not active).

• Click on "set".

• After confirming the change, the alarm relay will momentarily toggle to the chosen state. The alarm relay then reverts back to being controlled by the ACU+.

Manually Forcing LVDs

Place Controller in Manual Mode, then...

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / LVD / LVD Unit.

• Select the other state for an LVD

(connected/disconnected).

There are two steps in backing up the system’s ACU+ configuration.

• One step to save the ACU+ configuration package. This includes the base configuration and any changes made to

Warning alarm severity levels, relay assignments, signal names, and PLC expressions.

WARNING! This file is NOT forward compatible.

• One step to save a file named "SettingParam.run". This file contains changes made to alarm setpoints and other settings such as float/ equalize voltage, etc. A file named

"SettingParam.run" is automatically created/appended by the Controller whenever a User (or the factory at the time of shipment) makes changes to parameter settings via the LCD or WEB interface. This file can be saved to your computer so you can restore any custom settings you may have made.

Prior to changing settings, ensure the current configuration package and "SettingParam.run" files are backed up. After making changes, create new backup files.

Note that you may change the name of the configuration package

"app_cfg.tar" to differentiate it from other "app_cfg.tar" files saved.

The new name can use alpha and numeric characters preceding the original "app_cfg.tar" name (the end of the new file name must always be "app_cfg.tar"; for example, an acceptable filename would be "seville4app_cfg.tar").

Note that you may change the name of the "SettingParam.run" file to differentiate it from other "SettingParam.run" files saved. The new name can use alpha and numeric characters preceding the

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

26 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014) original "SettingParam.run" name (the end of the new file name must always be "SettingParam.run"; for example, an acceptable filename would be "seville4SettingParam.run").

SAVING THE CONFIGURATION PACKAGE

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance Menu / Download.

See also “Download/Upload Sub-Menu” on page 134.

1.

Log into the Controller using the WEB Interface.

2.

Select the Download Sub-Menu in the Maintenance

Menu.

3.

The "Stop Controller" window opens. Click on the "Stop

Controller" button.

4.

A Download window opens.

Warning

WARNING! Never navigate from this web page without first clicking on "Start Controller". If you do, you will not have web access. A manual system reset is required to restore web access.

5.

Select "Configuration Package" from the "File in

Controller" drop-down list box.

6.

Click on the "Upload" button.

Note: Ensure Internet Explorer security settings are set to enable a file to be copied to your computer.

7.

Select where you want the file to be copied to on your computer.

8.

Click "Start Controller".

Local Menu Navigation: none.

SAVING THE SETTINGPARAM.RUN FILE

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance Menu / “Retrieve SettingParam.run”.

See also “Retrieve ‘SettingParam.run’ File Sub-Menu” on page 136.

1.

Log into the Controller using the WEB Interface.

2.

Click on “Retrieve SettingParam.run” in the

MAINTENANCE MENU.

3.

Click on the “Retrieve File” button to save the file named

"SettingParam.run" to your hard drive.

Note: Ensure Internet Explorer security settings are set to enable a file to be copied to your computer.

4.

Select where you want the file to be copied to on your computer.

Local Menu Navigation: none.

Reloading a Backed-Up ACU+ Configuration

There are two steps in reloading a backed-up ACU+ configuration.

• One step to reload the saved ACU+ configuration package.

• One step to reload the saved "SettingParam.run" file.

RELOADING THE CONFIGURATION PACKAGE

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance Menu / Download.

See also “Download/Upload Sub-Menu” on page 134.

Warning

WARNING! This file can only be downloaded to a controller with the same software version the file was created from. This file is NOT forward compatible.

1.

Log into the Controller using the WEB Interface.

2.

Select the Download Sub-Menu in the Maintenance

Menu.

3.

The "Stop Controller" window opens. Click on the "Stop

Controller" button.

4.

A Download window opens.

Warning

WARNING! Never navigate from this web page without first clicking on "Start Controller". If you do, you will not have web access. A manual system reset is required to restore web access.

5.

Click the "Browse…." button and navigate to the folder where the file is located. Select the file and then click the

"Download" button.

6.

Click "Start Controller" to restart the Controller with the downloaded file installed.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Controller / Download Config

1.

Copy the configuration package to a USB memory device. The file must be in the root directory of the USB memory device and must be named app_cfg.tar or app_cfg.tar.gz.

2.

Connect the USB memory device to the USB port on the front of the Controller.

3.

Navigate to Main Menu / Settings / Controller / Download

Config.

4.

The only selection for "Download Config" is Yes. Once Yes is selected and confirmed, the configuration package

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

27 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014) located on the memory device located in the Controller's

USB port is loaded into the Controller.

5.

After the file is downloaded, remove the memory device from the Controller's USB port.

6.

Return to the Main Screen, then reboot the Controller

(press ENT and ESC at the same time).

7.

The screen displays "System Is Rebooting" then "App

Exited".

8.

The Controller enters an initialization routine, which takes a few minutes. The routine is complete and the

Controller is operational when normal system voltage is displayed on the screen.

RELOADING THE SETTINGPARAM.RUN FILE

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance Menu / Download.

See also “Download/Upload Sub-Menu” on page 134.

1.

Log into the Controller using the WEB Interface.

2.

Click on “Download” in the MAINTENANCE MENU.

3.

The "Stop Controller" window opens. Click on the "Stop

Controller" button.

4.

A Download window opens.

Warning

WARNING! Never navigate from this web page without first clicking on "Start Controller". If you do, you will not have web access. A manual system reset is required to restore web access.

5.

Click the "Browse…." button and navigate to the folder where the file is located. Select the file and then click the

"Download" button.

6.

Click "Start Controller" to restart the Controller with the downloaded file installed.

Local Menu Navigation: none.

Upgrading the ACU+ Using an Application ("All") Package

This procedure is typically used to upgrade your ACU+ when a new release of firmware is available for you application. The name of the Application "All" Package file must end in .tar or .tar.gz. An

Application “All” package file has both the application (software) and configuration package and is usually supplied for an application upgrade.

A User can copy an Application ("All") Package from your computer to a USB memory device. You can then place the USB memory device into the ACU+ USB port and then download the file into the

ACU+ Controller.

TO DOWNLOAD AN APPLICATION ("ALL") PACKAGE LOCALLY:

1.

Copy the file to a USB memory device. The file must be in the root directory of the USB memory device. The file must be named app.tar.gz.

2.

Connect the USB memory device to the USB port on the front of the Controller.

3.

With the Controller displaying the Main Screen, reboot the Controller (press ENT and ESC at the same time).

4.

The screen displays "Acknowledge Info. Reboot System."

5.

Press ENT to confirm.

6.

The screen displays…

"System Is Rebooting"

"App Exited" then the Emerson Network Power logo appears followed by…

“Press the key ENT to Download the Application."

7.

Press ENT.

8.

The screen displays "Please Wait".

9.

The Controller enters an initialization routine, which takes a few minutes. The routine is complete and the

Controller is operational when normal system voltage is displayed on the screen.

10.

Remove the memory device.

WEB MENU NAVIGATION:

SEE ALSO “DOWNLOAD/UPLOAD SUB-MENU” ON PAGE 134.

1.

Log onto the Controller using the WEB Interface.

2.

Click on “Download” in the MAINTENANCE MENU.

3.

The "Stop Controller" window opens. Click on the “Stop

Controller” button.

4.

A Download window opens.

Warning

WARNING! Never navigate from this web page without first clicking on "Start Controller". If you do, you will not have web access. A manual system reset is required to restore web access.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

28 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

5.

Click the “Browse….” button and navigate to the folder where the file is located. Select the file and then click the

“Download” button. Click “Start Controller” to restart the

Controller with the downloaded file installed.

Reloading the Configuration Package Stored in the ACU+

Controller (Restoring Defaults)

This procedure is typically used to restore any changes you made to any settings, relay assignments, alarm severities, signal names, or PLC expressions. This file is not shipped with the system. There are one or two steps required to restore your ACU+ as shipped.

• One step to reload the ACU+ configuration package

(required only if you made any changes to relay assignments, alarm severities, signal names, or PLC expressions).

• One step to reload the "SettingParam.run" file (required only if you made any setting changes like float/ equalize voltage or alarm thresholds).

Your system may have been configured for specific options at the factory which creates a

“SettingParam.run” file. Reloading the configuration

(restoring defaults) will return the system to the settings of the default configuration package. These are the settings before specific options may have been configured by the factory. To restore the system to the settings as shipped, after reloading the configuration

(restoring defaults), you must reload the factory provided “SettingParam.run” file.

Note: If a system was shipped with factory modified settings, the system is supplied with a USB memory device that contains a “SettingParam.run” file as shipped. The

“SettingParam.run” file has a seven-digit UIN (Unique

Identification Number) preceding the “SettingParam.run” filename. The UIN identifies a “SettingParam.run” file for use with a specific system. This file can be used to restore your system to the configuration as shipped. Refer to

“Reloading a Backed-Up ACU+ Configuration” on page 27

to reload the supplied “SettingParam.run” file.

PROCEDURE

Warning

WARNING! When this procedure is performed, the

Controller’s existing configuration and parameter settings will be lost. The “SettingParam.run” file is deleted. Before reloading the configuration (restoring

defaults), save the “SettingParam.run” file (see Backing

Up the ACU+ Configuration on page 26).

AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE, RELOAD THE

“SETTINGPARAM.RUN” FILE AND CONFIGURATION PACKAGE, IF

REQUIRED.

Local Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Controller / Reload Config.

The only selection for "Reload Config" is Yes. Once Yes is selected and confirmed, the configuration package stored in the ACU+

Controller is reloaded into memory. All settings WILL BE restored to the factory defaults of the configuration package.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / Restore Factory Defaults / select “Restore Defaults”.

See also “Restore Defaults Sub-Menu” on page 132.

Rebooting the Controller

Local Menu Navigation:

Press ENT and ESC at the same time to reset the ACU+ Controller.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / Restore Factory Defaults / select “Reboot

Controller”.

Note: After rebooting, you must exit your browser and re-login to see any changes made.

Spec. No. 588820300 Battery Rack System (Lithium Ion Battery

Configuration)

When the ACU+ is equipped with the Lithium Ion Battery

Configuration for use with Spec. No. 588820300 NetSure™ Battery

Rack System, the only required settings for battery functions is the float voltage and ABCL (Active Battery Charge Current Limit) point.

Note: The maximum value that the ABCL point can be adjusted to is

60A, which is below the maximum current the battery can handle.

The batteries communicate their status and alarms to the ACU+.

The ACU+ displays these via the LCD and WEB interfaces.

Batteries are added to the ACU+ inventory as they are detected. If a battery communications cable is removed, a Li-Ion Battery

Communication Fail alarm is generated. If the controller resets while a Li-Ion Battery Communication Fail alarm is active, the alarm changes to a Li-Ion Battery Lost alarm. If you clear any of these alarms, that battery is removed from the ACU+ inventory.

Setting SNMP Parameters

Local Menu Navigation: none.

WEB Menu Navigation:

Maintenance / NMSV2 Configuration and NMSV3 Configuration.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

29 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Available Alarms

Table 5 lists the alarms that you can scroll through in the Alarm Severity and Alarm Relay submenus. These are also the possible alarms that display in the Active Alarms sub-menu. Table 5 also provides guidelines for alarm correction.

Note: These instructions describe the complete functionality of the ACU+. Some functionality is dependent on hardware connected to the

ACU+. Some alarms listed may not display in your system or may be named differently. Refer to the ACU+ Configuration Drawing

(C-drawing) furnished with your system.

Refer also to the ACU+ Configuration Drawing (C-drawing) furnished with your system for factory default “Alarm Severity” and “Alarm

Relay” settings.

Table 5. Available Alarms

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Power System Alarms

(Power System)

Supervision Unit Fault

(SelfDetect Fail)

CAN Communication Failure

(CAN Comm Fail)

Outgoing Alarms Blocked

(Alarm Blocked)

Maintenance Time Limit

Alarm

(Mtnc Time Alarm)

“Config Error

(Backup Config)”

(Config Error 1)

“Config Error

(Default Config)”

(Config Error 2)

Imbalance System Current

(Imbalance Curr)

Over Load

(Over Load)

SPD

(SPD)

EStop/EShutdown

(EStop/EShutdown)

Controller self-detection test fails.

CAN bus communications failure.

Alarm relays are forced in the "off" state and alarms are blocked from changing the relay state.

Controller issues a maintenance alarm.

Configuration error 1.

Configuration error 2.

Current sharing imbalance.

Output overload condition.

Surge protection device needs attention.

System in emergency stop or emergency shutdown mode.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

30

Replace the Controller.

Check communications cables.

Verify why Controller setting was changed before changing back.

Perform routine maintenance and reset maintenance timer.

Reload configuration package.

Check to see why current sharing is imbalanced.

Check to see why output is overloaded.

Check surge protection device.

Check to see why the system was placed in this mode.

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

System Temp1 Not Used

(System T1 Not U)

System Temp2 Not Used

(System T2 Not U)

System Temp3 Not Used

(System T3 Not U)

IB2 Temp1 Not Used

(IB2 T1 Not Used)

IB2 Temp2 Not Used

(IB2 T2 Not Used)

EIB Temp1 Not Used

(EIB T1 Not Used)

EIB Temp2 Not Used

(EIB T2 Not Used)

System Temp1

Sensor Fault

(System T1 Senso)

System Temp2

Sensor Fault

(System T2 Senso)

System Temp3

Sensor Fault

(System T3 Senso)

IB2 Temp1 Sensor Fault

(IB2 T1 Sensor F)

IB2 Temp2 Sensor Fault

(IB2 T2 Sensor F)

EIB Temp1 Sensor Fault

(EIB T1 Sensor F)

EIB Temp2 Sensor Fault

(EIB T2 Sensor F)

DHCP Failure

(DHCP Failure)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Temperature sensor port #1 is not used.

Temperature sensor port #2 is not used.

Temperature sensor port #3 is not used.

Temperature sensor port #1 (on IB2

Board) is empty.

Temperature sensor port #2 (on IB2

Board) is empty.

Temperature sensor port #1 (on EIB

Board) is empty.

Temperature sensor port #2 (on EIB

Board) is empty.

(Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

--

--

Temperature sensor #1 failure.

Temperature sensor #2 failure.

(Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

Temperature sensor #3 failure.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

IB2 Board) failure.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

IB2 Board) failure.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

EIB Board) failure.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

EIB Board) failure.

The DHCP function is enabled, but effective IP address cannot be acquired.

Replace temperature sensor.

Replace temperature sensor.

Verify DHCP IP address.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

31 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

PLC Config Error

(PLC Config Err)

485 Communication Failure

(485 Comm Fail)

Minor Summary

(MN Summary)

Major Summary

(MJ Summary)

Critical Summary

(CR Summary)

Rectifier Group Lost

(Rect Group Lost)

Over Voltage 1

(Over Voltage 1)

Over Voltage 2

(Over Voltage 2)

Under Voltage 1

(Under Voltage 1)

Under Voltage 2

(Under Voltage 2)

Over Voltage 1 (24V)

(24V Over Volt1)

Over Voltage 2 (24V)

(24V Over Volt2)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

PLC configuration error. Re-enter the PLC logic functions.

485 communications failure. --

Minor alarm summary (one or more alarms designated as minor is active). Check additional alarms.

Major alarm summary (one or more alarms designated as major is active). Check additional alarms.

Critical alarm summary (one or more alarms designated as critical is active).

Check additional alarms.

Check communications cables.

Check additional alarms.

A rectifier group cannot be detected by the Controller.

Output voltage is higher than the

Over Voltage 1 Alarm threshold.

Output voltage is higher than the

Over Voltage 2 Alarm threshold.

Check to see why system voltage is high. Check the alarm setting.

Output voltage is lower than the

Under Voltage 1 Alarm threshold.

Output voltage is lower than the

Under Voltage 2 Alarm threshold.

Check to see why system voltage is low. If there is a mains failure, check if some load could be switched off in order to prolong the operating time of the plant. If the system load is too high related to rectifier capacity, install additional rectifiers. If the batteries are being recharged, the alarm will cease by itself when battery voltage has increased to the charging level.

Output voltage is higher than the

Over Voltage 1 Alarm threshold.

Output voltage is higher than the

Over Voltage 2 Alarm threshold.

Check to see why system voltage is high. Check the alarm setting.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

32 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Under Voltage 2 (24V)

(24V Under Volt2)

Diesel Run Over Temp

(DG Run OverTemp)

DG1 is Running

(DG1 is Running)

DG2 is Running

(DG2 is Running)

Hybrid is High Load

(High Load)

DG1 Failure

(DG1 Failure)

DG2 Failure

(DG2 Failure)

Grid is on

(Grid is on)

Ambient Temp High 1

(Amb Temp High1)

Ambient Temp Low

(Amb Temp Low)

Ambient Temp High 2

(Amb Temp High2)

Ambient Sensor Fault

(AmbSensor Fault)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Under Voltage 1 (24V)

(24V Under Volt1)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Output voltage is lower than the

Under Voltage 1 Alarm threshold.

Output voltage is lower than the

Under Voltage 2 Alarm threshold.

Diesel generator run over temperature alarm.

Diesel generator 1 is running.

Diesel generator 2 is running.

Diesel generator high load alarm.

Diesel generator 1 has failed.

Check to see why system voltage is low. If there is a mains failure, check if some load could be switched off in order to prolong the operating time of the plant. If the system load is too high related to rectifier capacity, install additional rectifiers. If the batteries are being recharged, the alarm will cease by itself when battery voltage has increased to the charging level.

Check diesel generator.

--

--

Check load on diesel generator.

Check diesel generator.

Diesel generator 2 has failed. Check diesel generator.

AC is on grid.

High diesel generator ambient temperature alarm1.

Low diesel generator ambient temperature alarm.

High diesel generator ambient temperature alarm2.

Diesel generator temperature sensor failure.

--

Check why temperature is high or low.

Replace temperature sensor.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

33 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

DI1Alarm

(DI1 Alarm)

DI7Alarm

(DI7 Alarm)

DI8 ESTOP

(DI8 ESTOP)

IB Communication Fail

(IB Comm Fail)

Relay Testing

(Relay Testing)

Testing Relay 1

(Testing Relay 1)

Testing Relay 8

(Testing Relay 8)

System Temp1 High 2

(System T1 Hi2)

System Temp1 High 1

(System T1 Hi1)

System Temp1 Low

(System T1 Low)

System Temp2 High 2

(System T2 Hi2)

System Temp2 High 1

(System T2 Hi1)

System Temp2 Low

(System T2 Low)

Alarm Description

Digital input #1 alarm is active.

Digital input #7 alarm is active.

Digital input #8 alarm is active.

ACU+ Interface Board communications failure.

Relay Test in progress.

Testing Relay 1 (on IB2 Board).

Testing Relay 8 (on IB2 Board).

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

34

Action to Correct

Check why alarm is active.

Check communications cables.

--

--

Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

System Temp3 High 2

(System T3 Hi2)

System Temp3 High 1

(System T3 Hi1)

System Temp3 Low

(System 31 Low)

IB2 Temp1 High 2

(IB2 T1 Hi2)

IB2 Temp1 High 1

(IB2 T1 Hi1)

IB2 Temp1 Low

(IB2 T1 Low)

IB2 Temp2 High 2

(IB2 T2 Hi2)

IB2 Temp2 High 1

(IB2 T2 Hi1)

IB2 Temp2 Low

(IB2 T2 Low)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

35 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

EIB Temp1 High 2

(EIB T1 Hi2)

EIB Temp1 High 1

(EIB T1 Hi1)

EIB Temp1 Low

(EIB T1 Low)

EIB Temp2 High 2

(EIB T2 Hi2)

EIB Temp2 High 1

(EIB T2 Hi1)

EIB Temp2 Low

(EIB T2 Low)

SMTemp1 Temp1 High 2

(SMTemp1 T1 Hi2)

SMTemp1 Temp1 High 1

(SMTemp1 T1 Hi1)

SMTemp1 Temp1 Low

(SMTemp1 T1 Low)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

EIB board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

EIB board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

EIB board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

EIB board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

EIB board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

EIB board and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

36 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

SMTemp1 Temp8 High 2

(SMTemp1 T8 Hi2)

SMTemp1 Temp8 High 1

(SMTemp1 T8 Hi1)

SMTemp1 Temp8 Low

(SMTemp1 T8 Low)

SMTemp8 Temp1 High 2

(SMTemp8 T1 Hi2)

SMTemp8 Temp1 High 1

(SMTemp8 T1 Hi1)

SMTemp8 Temp1 Low

(SMTemp8 T1 Low)

SMTemp8 Temp8 High 2

(SMTemp8 T8 Hi2)

SMTemp8 Temp8 High 1

(SMTemp8 T8 Hi1)

SMTemp8 Temp8 Low

(SMTemp8 T8 Low)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

Alarm Description

37

Action to Correct

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Ambient) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

High Load Level1

(HighLoadLevel1)

High Load Level2

(HighLoadLevel2)

Load Current Alarm

(Load Curr Alarm)

Rectifier Group Alarms

(Rect Group)

Multiple Rectifiers Failure

(Multi-Rect Fail)

Rectifier Lost

(Rectifier Lost)

ECO Active

(ECO Active)

All Rectifiers Comm Fail

(AllRectCommFail)

ECO Cycle Alarm

(ECO Cycle Alarm)

Alarm Description

Load current above high level 1.

Load current above high level 2.

Load current alarm active.

Check to see why load current is high.

Check to see why load current alarm is active.

Action to Correct

More than one rectifier has failed.

A rectifier cannot be detected by the

Controller.

Rectifier Energy Optimization Mode is enabled.

No response from all rectifiers.

Check input voltage to rectifiers.

Replace rectifiers.

Reset the Rectifier Lost alarm.

Replace defective rectifier.

Check to see why system was placed into this mode.

Check the connectors and cables or the CAN loop. Replace the Controller.

If Energy Optimization Mode is enabled and the Controller oscillates in and out of Energy Optimization more than 5 times, this alarm is generated.

Check for other alarms.

Reset this alarm.

Rectifier Alarms

(Rectifier)

AC Input Failure

(AC Failure)

Rect Temperature High

(Rect Temp High)

Rectifier Fault

(Rect Fault)

HVSD

(HVSD)

Rectifier Protected

(Rect Protected)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

No AC input power to a rectifier.

A rectifier has a high temperature condition.

A rectifier has a fault condition.

A rectifier has an overvoltage condition.

A rectifier is in protected mode.

38

Check why no AC input power available.

Check why temperature is high.

Refer to Rectifier User Manual for troubleshooting information.

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Fan Failure

(Fan Failure)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Current Limit

(Current Limit)

A rectifier’s fan has failed.

A rectifier is in current limit.

Rectifier Communication Fail

(Rect Comm Fail)

A rectifier has lost communications with the Controller.

Derated

(Derated)

Current Share Alarm

(Curr Share Alm)

AC Under Voltage Protection

(Low AC Protect)

A rectifier is in output power derating mode.

A rectifier has a current sharing alarm.

A rectifier is in under voltage protection mode.

Battery Group Alarms

(Battery Group)

Short Battery Test Running

(ShortBatTestRun)

Equalize for Test

(EQ for Test)

Manual Test

(Manual Test)

Planned Test

(Planned Test)

AC Fail Test

(AC Fail Test)

Battery is in short time test mode.

Battery is in equalize charge test mode.

Battery is in manual battery discharge test mode.

Battery is in planned battery test mode.

AC power has been switched off to the rectifiers to perform a battery discharge test.

Replace fan.

Rectifier overload. The load is higher than rectifier capacity. If the batteries are being recharged, the alarm will cease by itself when the battery voltage has increased to the charging level. If the system load is higher than the rectifier capacity, the batteries will discharge. If this is the reason, install additional rectifiers. If one or more of the rectifiers are defective, replace the faulty rectifiers.

Check communications cables. Reset the Communication Fail alarm.

Replace the rectifier.

Refer to Rectifier User Manual for troubleshooting information.

--

--

--

--

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

39 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Manual Equalize

(Manual EQ)

Automatic Equalize

(Auto EQ)

Cyclic Equalize

(Cyclic EQ)

Master Equalize

(Master EQ)

Master Battery Test

(Master Bat Test)

Battery is in manual equalize charging mode.

Battery is in automatic equalize charging mode.

Battery is in cyclic equalize charging mode.

In slave mode, the slave unit starts equalize charging with the master unit.

In slave mode, the slave unit starts the test with the master unit.

--

--

--

--

--

Discharge Current Imbalance

(Dsch Curr Imb)

Battery distribution current imbalance alarm.

The currents from two groups of batteries are not equal. Check the batteries.

Abnormal Battery Current

(Abnl Batt Curr)

Temperature Compensation

Active

(TempComp Active)

Battery Current

Limit Active

(Batt Curr Limit)

Bad Battery

(Bad Battery)

The equalize charging current exceeds the alarm setting.

Battery charge temperature compensation is active.

Battery is in current limit.

Battery test fails.

Check the alarm setting.

--

--

Check the batteries.

Battery Discharge

(Battery Disch)

Battery is discharging.

A battery test is active (the discharge test will stop automatically). There is a mains failure (check that it is not caused by open AC input circuit breaker). The system load is higher than rectifier capacity, causing the batteries to discharge (install additional rectifiers).

Battery Test Fail

(BatteryTestFail)

Battery test fails. Check the batteries.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

40 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Comp Temp High2

(Comp Temp High2)

Comp Temp High1

(Comp Temp High1)

Comp Temp Low

(Comp Temp Low)

Compensation Sensor Fault

(CompTempFail)

System Temp1 High 2

(System T1 Hi2)

System Temp1 High 1

(System T1 Hi1)

System Temp1 Low

(System T1 Low)

System Temp2 High 2

(System T2 Hi2)

System Temp2 High 1

(System T2 Hi1)

System Temp2 Low

(System T2 Low)

Compensation temperature sensor sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Compensation temperature sensor sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Compensation temperature sensor sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature Compensation temperature sensor failure.

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Replace temperature sensor.

Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

41 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

System Temp3 High 2

(System T3 Hi2)

System Temp3 High 1

(System T3 Hi1)

System Temp3 Low

(System T3 Low)

IB2 Temp1 High 2

(IB2 T1 Hi2)

IB2 Temp1 High 1

(IB2 T1 Hi1)

IB2 Temp1 Low

(IB2 T1 Low)

IB2 Temp2 High 2

(IB2 T2 Hi2)

IB2 Temp2 High 1

(IB2 T2 Hi1)

IB2 Temp2 Low

(IB2 T2 Low)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

IB2 board and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Note: This alarm is not used at this time.)

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

42 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

EIB Temp1 High 2

(EIB T1 Hi2)

EIB Temp1 High 1

(EIB T1 Hi1)

EIB Temp1 Low

(EIB T1 Low)

EIB Temp2 High 2

(EIB T2 Hi2)

EIB Temp2 High 1

(EIB T2 Hi1)

EIB Temp2 Low

(EIB T2 Low)

SMTemp1 Temp1 High 2

(SMTemp1 T1 Hi2)

SMTemp1 Temp1 High 1

(SMTemp1 T1 Hi1)

SMTemp1 Temp1 Low

(SMTemp1 T1 Low)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

EIB board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

EIB board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

EIB board and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

EIB board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

EIB board and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #2 (connected to

EIB board and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

43 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

SMTemp1 Temp8 High 2

(SMTemp1 T8 Hi2)

SMTemp1 Temp8 High 1

(SMTemp1 T8 Hi1)

SMTemp1 Temp8 Low

(SMTemp1 T8 Low)

SMTemp8 Temp1 High 2

(SMTemp8 T1 Hi2)

SMTemp8 Temp1 High 1

(SMTemp8 T1 Hi1)

SMTemp8 Temp1 Low

(SMTemp8 T1 Low)

SMTemp8 Temp8 High 2

(SMTemp8 T8 Hi2)

SMTemp8 Temp8 High 1

(SMTemp8 T8 Hi1)

SMTemp8 Temp8 Low

(SMTemp8 T8 Low)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

Alarm Description

44

Action to Correct

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 1 and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #1 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 2.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Battery) sensing temperature higher than high temperature threshold 1.

Temperature sensor #8 (connected to

SM-Temp 8 and set as Battery) sensing temperature lower than low temperature threshold.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Check why temperature is high or low.

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Battery Alarms

(Battery)

Battery Current Limit

Exceeded

(Ov Batt Cur Lmt)

Battery Over Current

(Batt Over Curr)

Low Battery Capacity

(Low Batt Cap)

Battery current limit point is exceeded.

Alarm Description Action to Correct

BTRM Temp High 2

(BTRM Temp High2)

BTRM Temp High 1

(BTRM Temp High1)

BTRM Sensor Fault

(BTRM TempFault)

Li-Ion Battery Lost

(LiBatt Lost)

1 Li-Ion Battery Disconnect

(1 LiBattDiscon)

2+Li-Ion Battery Disconnect

(2+LiBattDiscon)

1 Li-Ion Battery No Reply

(1 LiBattNoReply)

2+Li-Ion Battery No Reply

(2+LiBattNoReply)

Inventory Update In Process

(InventUpdating)

ABCL is active

(ABCL Active)

Battery temperature (monitored by the sensor set as BTRM) is higher than the BTRM Temperature Alarm 2 threshold.

Battery temperature (monitored by the sensor set as BTRM) is higher than the BTRM Temperature Alarm 1 threshold.

Check why temperature is high or low.

BTRM temperature sensor failure. Replace temperature sensor.

A Li-Ion Battery cannot be detected by the Controller.

One (1) Li-Ion Battery is disconnected.

Two (2) or more Li-Ion Batteries are disconnected.

One (1) Li-Ion Battery has lost communications with the Controller.

Two (2) or more Li-Ion Batteries have lost communications with the

Controller.

Li-Ion Battery inventory being updated.

Active Battery Charge Current Limit is active.

Check communications cables.

Clear the Li-Ion Battery Lost alarm.

Check why the Li-Ion Battery disconnected.

Check why the Li-Ion Batteries disconnected.

Check communications cables.

Clear the Li-Ion Communication Fail alarm.

Check communications cables.

Clear the Li-Ion Communication Fail alarm.

--

--

Battery is in over current.

Battery has low capacity.

--

--

Check the batteries.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

45 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

SMDU Battery Alarms (SM-DU Module must be present in system)

(SMDU Battery)

Exceed Current Limit

(Exceed Curr Lmt)

Over Battery Current

(Over Current)

Low Capacity

(Low Capacity)

Battery current limit point is exceeded.

Battery is in over current.

Battery has low capacity.

--

--

Check the batteries.

EIB (Extended Interface Board) Battery Alarms (EIB Board must be present in system)

(EIB Battery)

Battery Current Limit

Exceeded

(Ov Bat Curr Lmt)

Battery Over Current

(Bat Over Curr)

Battery Low Capacity

(Low Batt Cap)

Battery current limit point is exceeded.

Battery is in over current.

Battery has low capacity.

SM Battery Alarms (SM-BAT Module must be present in system)

(SM Battery)

--

--

Check the batteries.

Exceed Batt Current Limit

(Over Curr Limit)

Over Battery Current

(Over Batt Curr)

Battery Leakage

(Battery Leakage)

Low Acid Level

(Low Acid Level)

Battery Disconnected

(Batt Disconnec)

Battery High Temperature

(Batt High Temp)

Battery is in over current.

Battery current is high.

Battery has leakage current.

Battery has low acid level.

Battery disconnection is active.

Battery has high temperature condition.

--

--

Check the batteries.

Check the batteries.

--

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

46 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description

Battery current limit point is exceeded.

Battery has over current condition.

Battery monitoring device has lost communications with the Controller.

Action to Correct

Battery Low Temperature

(Batt Low Temp)

Cell Voltage Difference

(Cell Volt Diff)

SM Unit Fail

(SM Unit Fail)

Battery Temperature Sensor

Fault

(T Sensor Fault)

Low Capacity

(Low Capacity)

Battery Communication Fail

(Batt Comm Fail)

Battery Temp not Used

(Bat Temp No Use)

Battery has low temperature condition.

Battery cell voltage difference detected.

Battery monitoring device has failed. Replace device.

Battery temperature sensor has failed.

Battery has low capacity.

Battery monitoring device has lost communications with the Controller.

No battery temperature sensor.

LargeDU Battery Alarms (Large Distribution Unit must be present in system)

(LargeDU Batt)

--

Check the batteries.

Replace temperature sensor.

Check the batteries.

Check communications cables.

--

Battery Current Limit

Exceeded

(Ov Batt Cur Lmt)

Battery Low Capacity

(Batt Low Cap)

Battery Fuse Failure

(Batt Fuse Fail)

Battery Over Voltage

(Batt Over Volt)

Battery Under Voltage

(Batt Under Volt)

Battery Over Current

(Batt Over Curr)

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

Battery has low capacity.

Battery fuse is open.

Battery has over voltage condition.

Battery has under voltage condition.

--

Check the batteries.

--

--

--

--

Check communications cables.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

47 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description

SMBRC Battery Alarms (SM-BRC Module must be present in system)

(SMBRC Battery)

Cell Volt Low Alarm

(Volt Low Alm)

Cell Temp Low Alarm

(Temp Low Alm)

Cell Resist Low Alarm

(Resist Low Alm)

Cell Inter Low Alarm

(Inter Low Alm)

Cell Ambient Low Alarm

(Amb Low Alm)

Overall Voltage High

(Overall Volt Hi)

Overall Voltage Low

(Overall Volt Lo)

String Current High

(String Curr Hi)

String Current Low

(String Curr Lo)

Ripple Current High

(Ripple Curr Hi)

Ripple Current Low

(Ripple Curr Lo)

Exceed Current Limit

(Exceed Curr Lmt)

Over Battery Current

(Over Current)

Low Capacity

(Low Capacity)

Cell High Voltage Alarm

(Cell HiVolt Alm)

Battery string low voltage alarm.

Battery string low temperature alarm.

Battery string low resistance alarm.

Battery string inter-cell low resistance alarm.

Battery string ambient low alarm.

Battery string high voltage alarm.

Battery string low voltage alarm.

Battery string high current alarm.

Battery string low current alarm.

Battery string ripple current high.

Battery string ripple current low.

Battery string current limit exceeded.

Battery string over current alarm.

Battery string low capacity alarm.

Battery cell high voltage alarm.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

48

Action to Correct

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Cell High Cell Temperature

Alarm

(Cell HiTemp Alm)

Cell High Resistance Alarm

(Cell HiRes Alm)

Cell High Intercell Resist

Alarm

(Inter HiRes Alm)

Cell High Ambient

Temp Alarm

(Cell HiAmb Alm)

Temperature 1 Not Used

(Temp1 Not Used)

Temperature 24 Not Used

(Temp24 Not Used)

Battery Temperature Fault

(Batt Temp Fault)

Battery Current Fault

(Current Fault)

Battery Hardware Failure

(Hardware Fail)

Battery Over-Voltage

(Over-volt)

Battery Low-Voltage

(Low-volt)

Cell Volt Deviation

(CellVoltDeviat)

Low Cell Voltage

(Lo Cell Volt)

High Cell Voltage

(Hi Cell Volt)

High Cell Temperature

(Hi Cell Temp) alarm. alarm.

Alarm Description

Battery cell high temperature alarm.

Battery cell high resistance alarm.

Battery inter-cell high resistance

Battery cell high ambient temperature

Temperature sensor #1 not used.

Temperature sensor #24 not used.

Li-Ion battery internal temperature sensor has failed.

Li-Ion battery internal current monitoring circuit has failed.

Li-Ion battery hardware has failed.

Li-Ion battery has over voltage condition.

Li-Ion battery has low voltage condition.

Li-Ion battery cell voltage deviation detected.

Li-Ion battery has low cell voltage condition.

Li-Ion battery has high cell voltage condition.

Li-Ion battery has high cell temperature condition.

Action to Correct

--

--

--

--

--

Replace the battery.

Replace the battery.

Replace the battery.

Check why battery voltage is high.

Check why battery voltage is low.

Check why cell voltage has deviated.

Check why cell voltage is low.

Check why cell voltage is high.

Check why temperature is high.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

49 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

High Switch DisTemp

(HiSwitchDisTemp)

Charge Short Circuit

(Char ShortCirc)

DisChar Short Circuit

(DisCharShortCir)

High Switch CharTemp

(HiSwitchCharTem)

Hardware Fail 20

(HardwareFail20)

Hardware Fail 21

(HardwareFail21)

High Charge Current

(Hi Charge Curr)

High DisCharge Current

(Hi Dischar Curr)

Communication Interrupt

(Comm Interrupt)

Battery Disconnected

(Batt Disconnect)

Charge Enabled

(Charge Enable)

Battery Discharging

(Batt Discharge)

Battery Charging

(Batt Charge)

DisCharging

(DisCharging)

Charging(5A)

(Charging(5A))

DisCharging(5A)

(DisCharging(5A))

Battery Relay Status

(BattRelayStatus)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Li-Ion battery has high switch discharge temperature.

Li-Ion battery has charge short circuit condition.

Li-Ion battery has discharge short circuit condition.

Li-Ion battery has high switch charge temperature.

Check why temperature is high.

Replace the battery.

Replace the battery.

Check why temperature is high.

Li-Ion battery has hardware failure. Replace the battery.

Li-Ion battery has hardware failure.

Li-Ion battery has high charge current.

Li-Ion battery has high discharge current.

Li-Ion battery communications have been interrupted.

Li-Ion battery is disconnected.

Replace the battery.

Check why charge current high.

Check why discharge current high.

Check why communications failure.

Check why battery disconnected.

Li-Ion battery charge is enabled.

Li-Ion battery is discharging.

Li-Ion battery is charging.

Li-Ion battery is discharging.

--

--

--

--

Li-Ion battery is charging.

Li-Ion battery is discharging.

State of alarm relay.

--

--

If in alarm state, check battery.

50 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description

OB Battery Fuse Alarms (SM-DU Module must be present in system)

(OB Batt Fuse)

Fuse 1 Alarm

(Fuse 1 Alarm)

Fuse 4 Alarm

(Fuse 4 Alarm)

Fuse #1 is open.

Fuse #4 is open.

SMDU Battery Fuse Unit Alarms (SM-DU Module must be present in system)

(SMDU Bat Fuse)

Batt Fuse 1 Alarm

(Batt Fuse 1 Alm)

Batt Fuse 4 Alarm

(Batt Fuse 4 Alm)

DC Distribution Alarms

(DC Distr)

Over Voltage 1

(Over Voltage 1)

Over Voltage 2

(Over Voltage 2)

Under Voltage 1

(Under Voltage 1)

Under Voltage 2

(Under Voltage 2)

Over Voltage 1 (24V)

(24V Over Volt1)

Over Voltage 2 (24V)

(24V Over Volt2)

Battery fuse #1 is open.

Battery fuse #4 is open.

DC output is above over voltage 1 threshold.

DC output is above over voltage 2 threshold.

DC output is below under voltage 1 threshold.

DC output is below under voltage 2 threshold.

DC output is above over voltage 1 threshold.

DC output is above over voltage 2 threshold.

Action to Correct

Find out and eliminate the reason the fuse is open before replacing. Check for overload or short circuit. If the fuse was manually removed, check with the person that removed it before reinserting it.

Find out and eliminate the reason the fuse is open before replacing. Check for overload or short circuit. If the fuse was manually removed, check with the person that removed it before reinserting it.

Check to see why voltage is high.

Check to see why voltage is low.

Check to see why voltage is high.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

51 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Under Voltage 1 (24V)

(24V Under Volt1)

Under Voltage 2 (24V)

(24V Under Volt2)

DC Fuse Unit Alarms

(DC Fuse Unit)

DC output is below under voltage 1 threshold.

DC output is below under voltage 2 threshold.

Alarm Description

Fuse 1 Alarm

(Fuse 1 Alarm)

Fuse 10 Alarm

(Fuse 10 Alarm)

DC output fuse #1 is open.

DC output fuse #10 is open.

SMDU DC Fuse Alarms (SM-DU Module must be present in system)

(SMDU DC Fuse)

Fuse 1 Alarm

(DC Fuse 1 Alm)

Fuse 16 Alarm

(DC Fuse 16 Alm)

DC output fuse #1 is open.

DC output fuse #16 is open.

SMDUP DC Fuse Alarms (SM-DU+ Module must be present in system)

(SMDUP DC Fuse)

Fuse 1 Alarm

(DC Fuse 1 Alm)

Fuse 25 Alarm

(DC Fuse 25 Alm)

DC output fuse #1 is open.

DC output fuse #25 is open.

LVD Unit Alarms (Low voltage disconnect must be present in system)

(LVD Unit)

LVD1 Disconnect

(LVD1 Disconnect)

LVD1 contactor is in disconnect mode.

Action to Correct

Check to see why voltage is low.

Find out and eliminate the reason the fuse is open before replacing. Check for overload or short circuit. If the fuse was manually removed, check with the person that removed it before reinserting it.

Find out and eliminate the reason the fuse is open before replacing. Check for overload or short circuit. If the fuse was manually removed, check with the person that removed it before reinserting it.

Find out and eliminate the reason the fuse is open before replacing. Check for overload or short circuit. If the fuse was manually removed, check with the person that removed it before reinserting it.

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

52 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

LVD2 Disconnect

(LVD2 Disconnect)

LVD1 Failure

(LVD1 Failure)

LVD2 Failure

(LVD2 Failure)

Alarm Description

LVD2 contactor is in disconnect mode.

LVD1 contactor has failed.

LVD2 contactor has failed.

Action to Correct

--

Check the contactor functions.

Replace the contactor.

SMDU LVD Alarms (SM-DU Module must be present in system)

(SMDU LVD)

LVD 1 Disconnected

(LVD 1 Disconn)

LVD 2 Disconnected

(LVD 2 Disconn)

LVD 1 Contactor Failure

(LVD 1 Failure)

LVD 2 Contactor Failure

(LVD 2 Failure)

LVD1 contactor is in disconnect mode.

LVD2 contactor is in disconnect mode.

LVD1 contactor has failed.

LVD2 contactor has failed.

LargeDU LVD Alarms (Large Distribution Unit must be present in system)

(LargeDU LVD)

LVD1 Disconnected

(LVD1 Disconnect)

LVD2 Disconnected

(LVD2 Disconnect)

Rectifier AC Alarms

(Rectifier AC)

LVD1 contactor is in disconnect mode.

LVD2 contactor is in disconnect mode.

Line AB Over Voltage 1

(L-AB Over Volt1)

Line AB Over Voltage 2

(L-AB Over Volt2)

--

--

Check the contactor functions.

Replace the contactor.

--

--

Voltage between Line A and Line B is higher than the High Line Voltage AB

Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line A and Line B is higher than the Very High Line

Voltage AB Alarm threshold.

Check why voltage is high.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

53 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Line AB Under Voltage 1

(L-AB UnderVolt1)

Line AB Under Voltage 2

(L-AB UnderVolt2)

Line BC Over Voltage 1

(L-BC Over Volt1)

Line BC Over Voltage 2

(L-BC Over Volt2)

Line BC Under Voltage 1

(L-BC UnderVolt1)

Line BC Under Voltage 2

(L-BC UnderVolt2)

Line CA Over Voltage 1

(L-CA Over Volt1)

Line CA Over Voltage 2

(L-CA Over Volt2)

Line CA Under Voltage 1

(L-CA UnderVolt1)

Line CA Under Voltage 2

(L-CA UnderVolt2)

Phase A Over Voltage 1

(PH-A Over Volt1)

Phase A Over Voltage 2

(PH-A Over Volt2)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Voltage between Line A and Line B is lower than the Low Line Voltage AB

Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line A and Line B is lower than the Very Low Line Voltage

AB Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C is higher than the High Line Voltage BC

Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C is higher than the Very High Line

Voltage BC Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C is lower than the Low Line Voltage BC

Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C is lower than the Very Low Line Voltage

BC Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A is higher than the High Line Voltage CA

Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A is higher than the Very High Line

Voltage CA Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A is lower than the Low Line Voltage CA

Alarm threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A is lower than the Very Low Line Voltage

CA Alarm threshold.

Phase A voltage is above over voltage 1 threshold.

Phase A voltage is above over voltage 2 threshold.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

54 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description

Phase A Under Voltage 1

(PH-A UnderVolt1)

Phase A Under Voltage 2

(PH-A UnderVolt2)

Phase B Over Voltage 1

(PH-B Over Volt1)

Phase B Over Voltage 2

(PH-B Over Volt2)

Phase B Under Voltage 1

(PH-B UnderVolt1)

Phase B Under Voltage 2

(PH-B UnderVolt2)

Phase C Over Voltage 1

(PH-C Over Volt1)

Phase C Over Voltage 2

(PH-C Over Volt2)

Phase C Under Voltage 1

(PH-C UnderVolt1)

Phase C Under Voltage 2

(PH-C UnderVolt2)

Mains Failure

(Mains Failure)

Phase A voltage is below under voltage 1 threshold.

Phase A voltage is below under voltage 2 threshold.

Phase B voltage is above over voltage 1 threshold.

Phase B voltage is above over voltage 2 threshold.

Phase B voltage is below under voltage 1 threshold.

Phase B voltage is below under voltage 2 threshold.

Phase C voltage is above over voltage 1 threshold.

Phase C voltage is above over voltage 2 threshold.

Phase C voltage is below under voltage 1 threshold.

Phase C voltage is below under voltage 2 threshold.

Commercial AC power failure.

OB AC Unit (OB-AC Module must be present in system)

(OBAC)

Phase A Over Voltage 1

(PH-A Over Volt1)

Phase A Over Voltage 2

(PH-A Over Volt2)

Phase A Under Voltage 1

(PH-A UnderVolt1)

Phase A Under Voltage 2

(PH-A UnderVolt2)

Phase A voltage is above over voltage 1 threshold.

Phase A voltage is above over voltage 2 threshold.

Phase A voltage is below under voltage 1 threshold.

Phase A voltage is below under voltage 2 threshold.

Action to Correct

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why no commercial AC power.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

55 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Supervision Fail

(Supervise Fail)

High Line Voltage AB

(Hi LineVolt AB)

Very High Line Voltage AB

(VHi LineVolt AB)

Alarm Description

Phase B Over Voltage 1

(PH-B Over Volt1)

Phase B Over Voltage 2

(PH-B Over Volt2)

Phase B Under Voltage 1

(PH-B UnderVolt1)

Phase B Under Voltage 2

(PH-B UnderVolt2)

Phase C Over Voltage 1

(PH-C Over Volt1)

Phase C Over Voltage 2

(PH-C Over Volt2)

Phase C Under Voltage 1

(PH-C UnderVolt1)

Phase C Under Voltage 2

(PH-C UnderVolt2)

Mains Failure

(Mains Failure)

Severe Mains Failure

(SevereMainsFail)

Mains Failure (Single)

(Mains Failure)

Severe Mains Failure (Single)

(SevereMainsFail)

Phase B voltage is above over voltage 1 threshold.

Phase B voltage is above over voltage 2 threshold.

Phase B voltage is below under voltage 1 threshold.

Phase B voltage is below under voltage 2 threshold.

Phase C voltage is above over voltage 1 threshold.

Phase C voltage is above over voltage 2 threshold.

Phase C voltage is below under voltage 1 threshold.

Phase C voltage is below under voltage 2 threshold.

Commercial AC power failure.

Commercial AC power voltage is too low.

Commercial AC power failure.

Commercial AC power voltage is too low.

SMAC Alarms (SM-AC Module must be present in system)

(SMAC)

AC monitoring device has failed.

Voltage between Line A and Line B above high voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line A and Line B above very high voltage threshold.

Action to Correct

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why no commercial AC power.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why no commercial AC power.

Check why voltage is low.

--

Check why voltage is high.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

56 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Low Line Voltage AB

(Lo LineVolt AB)

Very Low Line Voltage AB

(VLo LineVolt AB)

High Line Voltage BC

(Hi LineVolt BC)

Very High Line Voltage BC

(VHi LineVolt BC)

Low Line Voltage BC

(Lo LineVolt BC)

Very Low Line Voltage BC

(VLo LineVolt BC)

High Line Voltage CA

(Hi LineVolt CA)

Very High Line Voltage CA

(VHi LineVolt CA)

Low Line Voltage CA

(Lo LineVolt CA)

Very Low Line Voltage CA

(VLo LineVolt CA)

High Phase Voltage A

(Hi PhaseVolt A)

Very High Phase Voltage A

(VHi PhaseVolt A)

Low Phase Voltage A

(Lo PhaseVolt A)

Very Low Phase Voltage A

(VLo PhaseVolt A)

High Phase Voltage B

(Hi PhaseVolt B)

Very High Phase Voltage B

(VHi PhaseVolt B)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Voltage between Line A and Line B below low voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line A and Line B below very low voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C above high voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C above very high voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C below low voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line B and Line C below very low voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A above high voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A above very high voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A below low voltage threshold.

Voltage between Line C and Line A below very low voltage threshold.

Phase A voltage is above high voltage threshold.

Phase A voltage is above very high voltage threshold.

Phase A voltage is below low voltage threshold.

Phase A voltage is below very low voltage threshold.

Phase B voltage is above high voltage threshold.

Phase B voltage is above very high voltage threshold.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

57 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Low Phase Voltage B

(Lo PhaseVolt B)

Very Low Phase Voltage B

(VLo PhaseVolt B)

High Phase Voltage C

(Hi PhaseVolt C)

Very High Phase Voltage C

(VHi PhaseVolt C)

Low Phase Voltage C

(Lo PhaseVolt C)

Very Low Phase Voltage C

(VLo PhaseVolt C)

Mains Failure

(Mains Failure)

Severe Mains Failure

(SevereMainsFail)

High Frequency

(High Frequency)

Low Frequency

(Low Frequency)

High Temperature

(High Temp)

Low Temperature

(Low Temperature)

Phase A High Current

(PH-A Hi Current)

Phase B High Current

(PH-B Hi Current)

Phase C High Current

(PH-C Hi Current)

Alarm Description

High phase C current.

Action to Correct

Phase B voltage is below low voltage threshold.

Phase B voltage is below very low voltage threshold.

Phase C voltage is above high voltage threshold.

Phase C voltage is above very high voltage threshold.

Phase C voltage is below low voltage threshold.

Phase C voltage is below very low voltage threshold.

Check why voltage is low.

Check why voltage is high.

Check why voltage is low.

Commercial AC power failure. Check why no commercial AC power.

Commercial AC power voltage is too low.

Commercial AC power has high frequency.

Commercial AC power has low frequency.

AC input temperature sensor sensing high temperature condition.

AC input temperature sensor sensing low temperature condition.

Check why voltage is low.

--

--

--

--

High phase A current. --

High phase B current. --

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

58 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

IB (Interface Board) Alarms (IB board must be present in system)

(IB)

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

Digital Input 1 Alarm

(DI1 Alarm)

Digital Input 8 Alarm

(DI8 Alarm)

Testing Relay1

(Testing Relay1)

Testing Relay8

(Testing Relay8)

IB board has lost communications with the Controller.

Digital input #1 in alarm state.

Digital input #8 in alarm state.

Testing Relay 1 (on IB2 Board).

Testing Relay 8 (on IB2 Board).

EIB (Extended Interface Board) Alarms (EIB2 board must be present in system)

(EIB)

Check communications cables.

--

--

--

EIB Communication Fail

(EIB Comm Fail)

Bad Battery Block

(Bad Batt Block)

Testing Relay9

(Testing Relay9)

Testing Relay13

(Testing Relay13)

EIB board has lost communications with the Controller.

Battery block fails.

Testing Relay 9 (on EIB Board).

Testing Relay 13 (on EIB Board).

SMDU 1 [2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8] Alarms (SM-DU Module must be present in system)

(SMDU 1 [2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8])

Under Voltage

(Under Voltage)

Over Voltage

(Over Voltage)

Distribution voltage is below under voltage threshold.

Distribution voltage is above over voltage threshold.

Check communications cables.

Check batteries.

Check to see why system voltage is low.

Check to see why system voltage is low.

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

59 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

Current1 High Current

(Curr 1 Hi)

Current1 Very High Current

(Curr 1 Very Hi)

Current5 High Current

(Curr 5 Hi)

Current5 Very High Current

(Curr 5 Very Hi)

Shunt1 Coefficient Conflict

(Shunt1 Conflict)

Shunt5 Coefficient Conflict

(Shunt5 Conflict)

Converter Group Alarms

(Converter Grp)

Multiple Converters Failure

(Multi-Conv Fail)

Converter Lost

(Converter Lost)

All Converters Comm Fail

(AllConvCommFail)

Over Current

(Over Current)

Converter Alarms

(Converter)

Alarm Description

The SM-DU 1 has lost communications with the Controller.

Current 1 has high current.

Current 1 has very high current.

Current 5 has high current.

Current 5 has very high current.

Shunt 1 coefficient conflicting.

Shunt 4 coefficient conflicting.

More than one converter has failed.

A converter cannot be detected by the Controller.

No response from all converters.

Over current condition exists.

Action to Correct

Check communications cables.

Check why current is high.

Verify shunt size.

Check input voltage to converters.

Replace converters.

Reset the Converter Lost alarm.

Replace defective converter.

Check the connectors and cables or the CAN loop. Replace the Controller.

Check why.

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

A converter has lost communications with the Controller.

Check communications cables. Reset the Communication Fail alarm.

Replace the converter.

60 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Over Temperature

(Over Temp)

HVSD Alarm

(HVSD Alarm)

Fan Failure

(Fan Failure)

Power Limit

(Power Limit)

Input Low Voltage

(Input Low Volt)

Converter Failure

(Converter Fail)

EEPROM Fail

(EEPROM Fail)

Thermal Shutdown

(Thermal SD)

Mod ID Overlap

(Mod ID Overlap)

Under Voltage

(Under Voltage)

Over Voltage

(Over Voltage)

A converter has an over temperature condition.

A converter has an overvoltage condition.

A converter’s fan has failed.

A converter is in temperature power limit.

Input voltage to a converter is low.

A converter has a fault condition.

A converter’s EEPROM has failed.

A converter is in thermal shutdown.

Converter module ID’s overlap.

A converter has an under voltage condition.

A converter has an over voltage condition.

Check why temperature is high.

Refer to Converter User Manual for troubleshooting information.

Replace fan.

Converter overload. The load is higher than converter capacity.

--

Refer to Converter User Manual for troubleshooting information.

SMIO 1 Generic Unit 1 Alarms (SM-IO Module must be present in system)

(SMIO 1)

SMIO Failure

(SMIO Fail)

SMIO has failed.

SMIO Generic Unit 3 [4, 5, 6, 7, 8] Alarms (SM-IO Module must be present in system)

(SMIO Unit 3 [4, 5, 6, 7, 8])

--

--

--

--

High Analog Input 1 Alarm

(Hi AI 1 Alarm)

Low Analog Input 1 Alarm

(Low AI 1 Alarm)

Input #1 above high alarm threshold.

Input #1 below low alarm threshold.

--

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

61 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

High Analog Input 5 Alarm

(Hi AI 5 Alarm)

Low Analog Input 5 Alarm

(Low AI 5 Alarm)

High Frequency Input Alarm

(Hi Freq In Alm)

Low Frequency Input Alarm

(Low Freq In Alm)

SMIO Failure

(SMIO Fail)

Testing Relay 1

(Testing Relay 1)

Testing Relay 2

(Testing Relay 2)

Testing Relay 3

(Testing Relay 3)

Alarm Description

Input #5 above high alarm threshold.

Input #5 below low alarm threshold.

Input frequency above high frequency alarm threshold.

Input frequency below low frequency alarm threshold.

SM-IO board failure.

Testing Relay 1.

Testing Relay 2.

Testing Relay 3.

Action to Correct

--

--

--

--

Replace the board.

LargeDU AC Distribution Group Alarms (Large Distribution Unit must be present in system)

(LargeDUACDist)

Mains Failure

(Mains Failure)

Commercial AC power failure.

LargeDU AC Distribution Alarms (Large Distribution Unit must be present in system)

(AC Distributi)

Mains 1 Failure

(Mains 1 Fail)

Mains 2 Failure

(Mains 2 Fail)

Mains 3 Failure

(Mains 3 Fail)

Mains 1 Uab/Ua Failure

(M1 Uab/Ua Fail)

AC input 1 power failure.

AC input 2 power failure.

AC input 3 power failure.

No AC input voltage between Line A and Line B of input 1.

--

--

--

--

--

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

62 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description

Mains 1 Ubc/Ub Failure

(M1 Ubc/Ub Fail)

Mains 1 Uca/Uc Failure

(M1 Uca/Uc Fail)

Mains 2 Uab/Ua Failure

(M2 Uab/Ua Fail)

Mains 2 Ubc/Ub Failure

(M2 Ubc/Ub Fail)

Mains 2 Uca/Uc Failure

(M2 Uca/Uc Fail)

Mains 3 Uab/Ua Failure

(M3 Uab/Ua Fail)

Mains 3 Ubc/Ub Failure

(M3 Ubc/Ub Fail)

Mains 3 Uca/Uc Failure

(M3 Uca/Uc Fail)

Over Frequency

(Over Frequency)

Under Frequency

(Under Frequency)

Mains 1 Uab/Ua Over

Voltage

(M1 Uab/Ua OverV)

Mains 1 Ubc/Ub Over Voltage

(M1 Ubc/Ub OverV)

Mains 1 Uca/Uc Over Voltage

(M1 Uca/Uc OverV)

Mains 2 Uab/Ua Over

Voltage

(M2 Uab/Ua OverV)

Mains 2 Ubc/Ub Over Voltage

(M2 Ubc/Ub OverV)

No AC input voltage between Line B and Line C of input 1.

No AC input voltage between Line C and Line A of input 1.

No AC input voltage between Line A and Line B of input 2.

No AC input voltage between Line B and Line C of input 2.

No AC input voltage between Line C and Line A of input 2.

No AC input voltage between Line A and Line B of input 3.

No AC input voltage between Line B and Line C of input 3.

No AC input voltage between Line C and Line A of input 3.

Input frequency above over frequency alarm threshold.

Input frequency below under frequency alarm threshold.

AC input 1 voltage between Line A and Line B above over voltage threshold.

AC input 1 voltage between Line B and Line C above over voltage threshold.

AC input 1 voltage between Line C and Line A above over voltage threshold.

AC input 2 voltage between Line A and Line B above over voltage threshold.

AC input 2 voltage between Line B and Line C above over voltage threshold.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

63

Action to Correct

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description

Mains 1Uab/Ua Under

Voltage

(M1Uab/Ua UnderV)

Mains 1Ubc/Ub Under

Voltage

(M1Ubc/Ub UnderV)

Mains 1Uca/Uc Under

Voltage

(M1Uca/Uc UnderV)

Mains 2Uab/Ua Under

Voltage

(M2Uab/Ua UnderV)

Mains 2Ubc/Ub Under

Voltage

(M2Ubc/Ub UnderV)

Mains 2Uca/Uc Under

Voltage

(M2Uca/Uc UnderV)

Mains 3Uab/Ua Under

Voltage

(M3Uab/Ua UnderV)

Mains 3Ubc/Ub Under

Voltage

(M3Ubc/Ub UnderV)

Mains 2 Uca/Uc Over Voltage

(M2 Uca/Uc OverV)

Mains 3 Uab/Ua Over

Voltage

(M3 Uab/Ua OverV)

Mains 3 Ubc/Ub Over Voltage

(M3 Ubc/Ub OverV)

Mains 3 Uca/Uc Over Voltage

(M3 Uca/Uc OverV)

AC input 2 voltage between Line C and Line A above over voltage threshold.

AC input 3 voltage between Line A and Line B above over voltage threshold.

AC input 3 voltage between Line B and Line C above over voltage threshold.

AC input 3 voltage between Line C and Line A above over voltage threshold.

AC input 1 voltage between Line A and Line B below under voltage threshold.

AC input 1 voltage between Line B and Line C below under voltage threshold.

AC input 1 voltage between Line C and Line A below under voltage threshold.

AC input 2 voltage between Line A and Line B below under voltage threshold.

AC input 2 voltage between Line B and Line C below under voltage threshold.

AC input 2 voltage between Line C and Line A below under voltage threshold.

AC input 3 voltage between Line A and Line B below under voltage threshold.

AC input 3 voltage between Line B and Line C below under voltage threshold.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

64

Action to Correct

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Mains 3Uca/Uc Under

Voltage

(M3Uca/Uc UnderV)

AC Input MCCB Trip

(Input MCCB Trip)

AC Output MCCB Trip

(OutputMCCB Trip)

SPD Trip

(SPD Trip)

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

AC input 3 voltage between Line C and Line A below under voltage threshold.

Main input circuit breaker open.

Main output circuit breaker open.

--

--

--

Surge protection device tripped. --

AC distribution monitoring device has lost communications with the

Controller.

Check communications cables.

LargeDU DC Distribution Alarms (Large Distribution Unit must be present in system)

(DC Distributi)

DC Over Voltage

(DC Over Volt)

DC Under Voltage

(DC Under Volt)

DC Output 1 Disconnected

(Output1 Discon)

...

DC Output 64 Disconnected

(Output64 Discon)

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

Temperature 1 Over

Temperature

(T1 Over Temp)

Temperature 2 Over

Temperature

(T2 Over Temp)

DC output voltage above over voltage threshold.

DC output voltage below under voltage threshold.

Output #1 distribution device open.

...

--

--

--

Output #64 distribution device open. --

DC distribution monitoring device has lost communications with the

Controller.

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature higher than over temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature higher than over temperature threshold.

Check communications cables.

--

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

65 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Temperature 3 Over

Temperature

(T3 Over Temp)

Temperature 1 Under

Temperature

(T1 Under Temp)

Temperature 2 Under

Temperature

(T2 Under Temp)

Temperature 3 Under

Temperature

(T3 Under Temp)

Temperature 1 Sensor

Failure

(T1 Sensor Fail)

Temperature 2 Sensor

Failure

(T2 Sensor Fail)

Temperature 3 Sensor

Failure

(T3 Sensor Fail)

Diesel Generator Group Alarms

(Dsl Gen Group)

Alarm Description

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature higher than over temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 sensing temperature lower than under temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #2 sensing temperature lower than under temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #3 sensing temperature lower than under temperature threshold.

Temperature sensor #1 failure.

Temperature sensor #2 failure.

Temperature sensor #3 failure.

Diesel Generator Test

Running

(Test Running)

Diesel Generator Test Failure

(Test Failure)

Diesel test in progress.

Diesel test failed.

Diesel Generator Alarms

(Dsl Generator)

Low DC Voltage

(Low DC Voltage)

Diesel Generator Supervision

Fai

(SupervisionFail)

Generator has low DC voltage.

Generator monitoring device has failed.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

66

Action to Correct

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Diesel Generator Failure

(Diesel Fail)

Diesel Generator Connected

(Diesel Connect)

Low Fuel Level

(Low Fuel Level)

High Water Temperature

(High Water Temp)

Low Oil Pressure

(Low Oil Press)

Alarm Description

Generator has failed.

Generator is connected to the system.

Generator has low fuel level.

Generator has high water temperature.

Generator has low oil pressure.

Rectifier Group 2 [3, 4] Alarms

(Rect Group 2 [3, 4])

All Rectifiers Comm Fail

(AllRectCommFail)

Rectifier Lost

(Rectifier Lost)

Comm Failure

(Comm Failure)

Mains Failure

(Mains Failure)

Group 2 [3, 4] Rectifier Alarms

(Group 2 [3, 4] Rect)

AC Input Failure

(AC Failure)

Rect Temperature High

(Rect Temp High)

Rectifier Fault

(Rect Fault)

Over Voltage

(Over Voltage)

Rectifier Protected

(Rect Protected)

No response from all rectifiers.

A rectifier cannot be detected by the

Controller.

A rectifier has lost communications with the Controller.

Rectifier commercial AC input power failure.

No AC input power to a rectifier.

A rectifier has a high temperature condition.

A rectifier has a fault condition.

A rectifier has an over voltage condition.

A rectifier is in protected mode.

Action to Correct

--

--

--

--

--

Check the connectors and cables or the CAN loop. Replace the Controller.

Reset the Rectifier Lost alarm.

Replace defective rectifier.

Reset the Comm Fail alarm. Replace defective rectifier.

--

Check why no AC input power available.

Check why temperature is high.

Refer to Rectifier User Manual for troubleshooting information.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

67 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Fan Failure

(Fan Failure)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

Current Limit

(Current Limit)

A rectifier’s fan has failed.

A rectifier is in current limit.

Rectifier Communication Fail

(Rect Comm Fail)

A rectifier has lost communications with the Controller.

Derated

(Derated)

Current Share Alarm

(CurrShare Alarm)

Low AC Voltage Protection

(Low AC Protect)

A rectifier is in output power derating mode.

A rectifier has a current sharing alarm.

A rectifier is in under voltage protection mode.

SMDUP Alarms (SM-DU+ Module must be present in system)

(SMDUP)

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

Current1 High Current

(Curr 1 Hi)

Current1 Very High Current

(Curr 1 Very Hi)

Current25 High Current

(Curr 25 Hi)

Communications failure.

Current 1 high.

Current 1 very high.

Current 25 high.

Replace fan.

Rectifier overload. The load is higher than rectifier capacity. If the batteries are being recharged, the alarm will cease by itself when the battery voltage has increased to the charging level. If the system load is higher than the rectifier capacity, the batteries will discharge. If this is the reason, install additional rectifiers. If one or more of the rectifiers are defective, replace the faulty rectifiers.

Check communications cables. Reset the Communication Fail alarm.

Replace the rectifier.

Refer to Rectifier User Manual for troubleshooting information.

Check communications cables.

--

--

--

--

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

68 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description

Current25 Very High Current

(Curr 25 Very Hi)

Current 25 very high.

SMBRC Unit Alarms (SM-BRC Module must be present in system)

(SMBRC Unit)

Communication Fail

(Comm Fail)

Ambient High Temperature

(Amb Temp High)

Ambient Low Temperature

(Amb Temp Low)

Ambt Temp Not Used

(Amb Temp No Use)

Communications failure.

Ambient high temperature alarm.

Ambient low temperature alarm.

No ambient temperature sensor.

Fuel Tank Group Alarms

(Fuel Tank Grp)

Fuel Group Communication

Failure

(Fuel Comm Fail)

Fuel Tank Alarms

(Fuel Tank)

High Fuel Level Alarm

(Hi Level Alarm)

Low Fuel Level Alarm

(Low Level Alarm)

Fuel Theft Alarm

(Fuel Theft Alm)

Tank Height Error

(Tank Height Err)

Fuel Tank Config Error

(Fuel Config Err)

Fuel tank group communication failure.

Fuel tank high level alarm.

Fuel tank low level alarm.

Fuel tank theft alarm.

Fuel tank height error.

Fuel tank configuration error.

Action to Correct

--

Check communications cables.

--

--

--

Check communications cables.

--

--

--

--

--

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

69 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 5

Full Alarm Name – WEB

(Abbreviated

Alarm Name - LCD)

Alarm Description Action to Correct

SM Temp Group (SM-Temp Module must be present in system)

(SM Temp Group)

SM Temp Lost

(SMTemp Lost)

SM-Temp cannot be detected by the

Controller.

SM Temp 1-8 (SM-Temp Module must be present in system)

(SMTemp 1-8)

Communication Interrupt

(Comm Interrupt)

Temperature Probe 1

Shorted

(Probe1 Short)

Temperature Probe 8

Shorted

(Probe8 Short)

Temperature Probe 1 Open

(Probe1 Open)

Temperature Probe 8 Open

(Probe8 Open)

SM-Temp has lost communications with the Controller.

Probe shorted.

Probe shorted.

Probe open.

Probe open.

Reset the SMTemp Lost alarm.

Replace defective SM-Temp.

Check communications cables.

Replace temperature probe.

Replace temperature probe.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

70 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Power Split Feature

In Power Split applications, the output of the power system controlled by the ACU+ can be connected in parallel with an existing power system. Each system is controlled independently via its own Controller. The ACU+ power system is referred to as the

"slave" system and the existing power system as the "master" system. The Power Split feature controls the ACU+ power system’s output voltage and rectifiers' current limit so that the "slave" power system shares the load with the "master" system.

Optional Functions: The ACU+ Controller can mimic the equalize and battery test functions of the “master” system’s Controller. In addition, the ACU+ Controller can mimic the low voltage load disconnect and/or low voltage battery disconnect functions of the

“master” system. This is accomplished by supplying digital signals from the “master” system’s Controller to the ACU+. This allows these functions to remain active in the “master” system.

Overview

See “Power Split Feature” on page 6.

How Power Split Works

There are four User adjustable parameters for Power Split. They are:

• Slave Curr Lmt: Current limit point for power system designated as the slave system in a "Power Split" configuration.

• Delta Volt: The offset voltage that the power system designated as the slave system in a "Power Split" configuration is set to. It is suggested to leave this value at the default (0.5 volts).

• Proportion Coeff: The proportional coefficient that the power system designated as the slave system in a "Power

Split" configuration is set to. It is suggested to leave this value at the default (30%).

• Integral Time: The integral time that the power system designated as the slave system in a "Power Split" configuration is set to. It is suggested to leave this value at the default (60 seconds).

The ACU+ Controller uses these parameters to control the load sharing operation between the two power systems.

Depending on the systems’ configurations, their rectifier capacities, their distribution load capacities, and the Power Split configuration; four operating modes can occur.

Low Load Operation

When the total load current demand is lower than the SLAVE

CURRENT LIMIT value, the ACU+ power system voltage will be increased by the programmed DELTA VOLTAGE setting forcing the

ACU+ power system to carry the load. Make sure that the output voltage does not exceed the battery float range recommended by the manufacturer. In this operating mode, no current will be delivered by the existing power system.

Normal Load Operation

When the total load current demand reaches the SLAVE CURRENT

LIMIT value, the ACU+ power system operates in output current limit and its output voltage will be decreased (up to the DELTA

VOLTAGE setting) in order to regulate the current, allowing the existing power system to deliver the remaining current. Both the

ACU+ power system and the existing power system are now providing current to the load.

High Load Operation

If current demand increases and the existing power system reaches its current limit setting, float voltage will again begin to decrease. When the voltage falls below the float setting minus the

DELTA VOLTAGE setting, the ACU+ system will come out of current limit and now deliver the additional current necessary to satisfy the load. This operation may occur when the batteries are being recharged, such as after a commercial AC failure.

Over Load Operation

If the load current is greater than the combined current capacities of the ACU+ system and the existing power system, both power systems will go into current limit. Both systems and the batteries will feed the load. The output voltage will depend on the conditions of the batteries. This operation occurs if the total capacity of the rectifiers is too low in relation to the need for increased current.

Operating Modes

Figure 5 illustrates the four modes of operation described above.

The Normal Load Operation is considered to be the normal mode.

In this mode both the ACU+ system and the existing parallel power system are both delivering load current. This is main purpose of using Power Split, to avoid putting the burden of delivering the entire load onto one of the two power systems.

Requirements and Conditions

The two DC power systems must be connected in parallel as

described in “Paralleling the Existing and ACU+ Power Systems” on page 72.

Before paralleling the two systems, the following conditions must be met for proper Power Split function.

Note: The control features of the combined system are limited to those of the original power system.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

71 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Note: The same type of batteries with an equal amount of cells and the same charging voltages must be used for both systems.

• The float voltage, equalize voltage, and battery test voltage of the ACU+ power system must be set to the same levels as that of the existing power system.

• The remote sense, if available and connected, of both the

ACU+ power system and existing power system must be connected to the same point.

• If batteries are used, they must be of the same type.

• All the functions specific to the existing power system and ACU+ power system and which depend on the voltage or which act on the voltage must be disabled from the existing power system and ACU+ power system.

This includes the following… a.

any equalization function, b.

any temperature compensation function, c.

any charge control function, d.

any battery discharge test function, and e.

any invalid current alarm.

In lieu of this, if battery charging and battery test functions are implemented in the existing power system, they can remain if signals for starting are connected from the control system of the existing system to the ACU+ system.

Paralleling the Existing and ACU+ Power Systems

Admonishments

GENERAL SAFETY

Danger: YOU MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY PROCEDURES.

Performing the following procedures may expose you to hazards. These procedures should be performed by qualified technicians familiar with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards: a) The tasks should be performed in the order indicated. b) Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry. c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is present. d) Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools. e) Use double insulated tools appropriately rated for the work to be performed.

AC INPUT VOLTAGES

Danger: This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal electrical shock.

DC INPUT/OUTPUT VOLTAGES

Danger: Connecting the ACU+ power system to an existing power system for “Power Split” mode involves working on live equipment carrying live loads. This system produces DC power and may require battery to be connected to it.

Although the DC voltage is not hazardously high, the rectifiers and/or battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire connected to a battery terminal.

NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can cause explosion and injury.

Remove watches, rings, or other jewelry before connecting leads. Cover any live busbars with a canvas sheet to prevent short circuits caused by falling tools or parts.

Preparing the Existing and ACU+ Power Systems

• Install and turn-up the ACU+ power system as describe in the installation instructions furnished with the power system.

• Set the float voltage on both the existing and ACU+ power systems to the same level. Temperature compensation functionality, if used, should be disabled on both power systems.

Paralleling the Systems

• Connect the Battery and Battery Return busbars of the

ACU+ Power System to the main charge busbars (rectifier side of the shunt) on the parallel power system. Size the cable for the largest current between systems.

Note 1: The connections between the two power systems should be done with power cables appropriately sized to be capable of carrying the maximum current that can circulate between the two power systems.

Note 2: If the parallel power system incorporates a main plant shunt, the connections of the cables from the ACU+ power system to the parallel power system shall be made on the main charge busbars (rectifier side of the shunt).

Note 3: To compensate for voltage drop, it is recommended to connect the ACU+ power system’s remote sense leads (if available) to the same point of sensing as the parallel power system.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

72 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Note 4: There shall be only one battery return reference (BRR) cable for the two power systems. If the cable is appropriately sized on the parallel power system, keep it as the BRR for both power systems. If the cable is not appropriately sized on the parallel power system, install a new BRR cable and connect it preferably to the ACU+ power system since the parallel power system may eventually be phased out.

Note 5: If battery disconnect units (BDUs) are used on the new or parallel power system, these shall be wired in such a way as to be all triggered simultaneously in order to prevent any overloading of these.

Note 6: For the size and number of bridge cables between the two power systems, take into consideration the voltage drop, the available connecting points in each system, as well as the fact that these cables are unfused and shall therefore be run on a dedicated cable rack. “C” or “H” taps may be used to make full use of available connecting points.

Note 7: The legacy system retains the function of its controller and the percent of load on each plant is controlled by the ACU+.

Alarms may be sent individually from each plant, or combined using an ACU+ Interface Board and the programmable relays resident in the controller.

Note 8: Add a label on both power systems to indicate that these are operating in the Power Split Mode with each other.

• Optional Function Connections: The following signals from the existing system must be connected to digital inputs of the ACU+ system interface board for these functions to be active: Equalize Charge in Progress,

Battery Test in Progress, Load LVD Active, and Battery

LVD Active. Otherwise disable these functions.

Programming the ACU+ Power Split Feature

After an ACU+ power system has been connected to an existing power system and both systems set for the same float voltage, you will have to configure the Power Split parameters in the ACU+.

PROCEDURE

1.

Set the Power Split mode to slave. Navigate to Main

Menu / Settings / Power System / General / Contactor

Mode. Set this parameter to “Slave Control”.

2.

Reboot the ACU+ by pressing ESC and ENT at the same time.

3.

Navigate to Main Menu / Settings / Power System / Power

Split.

4.

Navigate to and set the “Slave Current Limit” to a value that will force the ACU+ system’s rectifiers to operate in current limiting mode.

Note: The Slave Current Limit must be set lower than the total distribution current from the two plants. The default value is

60% of the ACU+ power system’s rectifier capacity.

5.

Navigate to and set the “Delta Voltage”. This voltage is by default set to 0.5V but can be readjusted.

• If the distribution current is lower than 50% of the total capacity of the ACU+ power system, the “Delta Voltage” can be adjusted to a lower level than 0.5V to get a system voltage that is closer to the desired float charging voltage.

• If the voltage drop between the existing system and the ACU+ system is expected to be >0.5V, the “Delta Voltage” can be adjusted to a higher level than 0.5 V to get a correct split function.

• Temperature controlled battery charging cannot be set in the ACU+ power system in power split mode. If this function is implemented in the existing power system, a limited function within a temperature range of approximately ±15°C will be achieved if the

Delta Voltage is set to a higher level, maximum

2.00V.

• If the “Delta Voltage” 0.5V is considered to be too high, the split function can be tested at various modes of operation to find a lower setting.

Optional Function Setup

EQUALIZE CHARGE SETUP

If the equalize charge function is to be used, equalize charge must be implemented in the existing power system and an equalizing signal from its control unit must be connected to the ACU+.

1.

Navigate to Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Charge / EQ

Voltage. Set the “EQ Voltage” to the same value as the equalize voltage of the existing power system.

2.

Using the Web Interface (Maintenance / Edit PowerSplit), select the ACU+ digital input connected to the existing systems equalize control circuit.

Note: Equalize charging is controlled by the existing power system via an incoming digital signal. The system will remain at the set equalize charge voltage level as long as this signal is active.

BATTERY TEST SETUP

If the battery test function is to be used, battery test must be implemented in the existing power system and a test signal from its control unit must be connected to the ACU+.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

73 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

1.

Navigate to Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Test.

2.

Navigate to and set the “Test End Volt” to the same value as the end voltage of the existing power system.

3.

Navigate to and set the “Test Volt Lmt” to the same value as the test voltage of the existing power system.

4.

Using the Web Interface (Maintenance / Edit PowerSplit), select the ACU+ digital input connected to the existing systems battery test control circuit.

Note: Other settings in this menu regarding “Battery Test” are inactive.

Note: Battery test is controlled by the existing power system via an incoming digital signal. The system will remain at battery test as long as this signal is active.

LOW VOLTAGE DISCONNECT SETUP

If low voltage disconnect functions are to be used, they must be implemented in the existing power system and signals from its control unit must be connected to the ACU+.

1.

Using the Web Interface (Maintenance / Edit PowerSplit), select the ACU+ digital inputs connected to the low voltage disconnect control circuits.

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED BATTERY CHARGE

There is no possibility to activate the “Temperature Compensated

Battery Charge” function when the ACU+ power system is configured for “Power Split” mode.

However, the possibility to change the “Delta Voltage” enables the

ACU+ power system to follow the existing power system that has the functionality to a certain limit.

Example: The “Delta Voltage” in the ACU+ power system is set to

1.0V. The existing power system is set to compensate 3.0 mV/cell/°C. This means that the ACU+ power system can follow the temperature compensation of the existing ;power system in the range of ±14°C from the set normal battery temperature (3.0 mV x

24 cells x 14°C = 1.008 V).

Verifying the Operation of the Power Split Feature

After programming the “Power Split” feature, verify its operation as follows.

1.

In a Power Split application where the ACU+ power system is taking all of the load and the rectifiers in the existing power system are all in the standby mode, use an external dry load bank of sufficient capacity to increase the load on the ACU+ power system over the “SLAVE

CURRENT LIMIT” value. a.

Verify that the ACU+ power system limits the total output of its rectifiers to the current equivalent to this programmed percentage. b.

Verify that the ACU+ power system lowers its output voltage by the value of the programmed “DELTA

VOLTAGE”. c.

Verify that the rectifiers in the existing power system take the additional load as the load increases pass the “SLAVE CURRENT LIMIT” value. d.

Further increase the load in order to exceed the total capacity of the rectifiers in the existing power system (or shut down some of the rectifiers in the existing power system if the capacity of the external dry load bank is not sufficient). Verify that the ACU+ power system starts taking the additional load as soon as the total capacity of the rectifiers in the existing power system is exceeded.

2.

In a Power Split application where the ACU+ power system is taking only part of the load (operating continuously at the current level equivalent to the programmed “SLAVE CURRENT LIMIT” percentage) and the rectifiers in the existing power system are taking the rest of the load, use an external dry load bank of sufficient capacity to increase the load in order to exceed the total capacity of the rectifiers in the existing power system (or shut down some of the rectifiers in the existing power system if the capacity of the external dry load bank is not sufficient). a.

Verify that the ACU+ power system starts taking the additional load as soon as the total capacity of the rectifiers in the existing power system is exceeded.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

74 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Local Display Menus

Overview

This section provides descriptions of the Local Display Menus. Refer also to “Passwords and Access Levels” on page 12 and “Description of

Local Display (and Web Interface) Menus Line Items” on page 87. For WEB interface, refer to “WEB Interface Menus” on page 102.

Menus

Figure 9 provides flow diagrams of the menus accessed via the ACU+ Controller local display and keypad.

Note: These instructions describe the complete functionality of the ACU+. Some functionality is dependent on hardware connected to the

ACU+. Some menu items shown may not be present in the ACU+ used in your system.

General

Factory Default Setpoints

Refer to the Configuration Drawing (C-drawing) furnished with your system for a list of factory default values.

Adjustment Range Restrictions

See Figure 8 .

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

75 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 8. Adjustment Range Restrictions

SETTING DEFAULT

HVSD

OV2

Hi Clamp

OV1

EQ

Float

Lo Clamp

LVRx

UV1

Test End

Test Volt

UV2

LVDx

(26)

49

(24.5)

48

(25)

45.2

(22.7)

45

(22.7)

44

(23)

42

(21)

59

(29.5)

58

(29)

58

(29)

57

(28.5)

56.5

(28)

54

(27.2)

52

ACU+ Setting Restriction

SETTABLE CONSTRAINT

48V (24V) OFFSET

KEY: 0V -0.2V

(-0.5V)

-1V

(-1V)

-2V -2.5V

0V +0.2V

+1V

(+0.5V)

+2V

(+1V)

+2.5V

arrow head means < or > arrow head means <= or >=

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

76

Setting Float:

Setting EQ:

Setting HVSD:

Setting OV1:

Float >= LVRx +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

Float <= HVSD -1 for 48V, -0.5 for 24V

EQ >= LVRx +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

EQ <= HVSD -1 for 48V, -0.5 for 24V

HVSD >= DCV Control +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

HVSD >= Float +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

HVSD >= EQ +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

HVSD >= Hi Clamp +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

OV1 <= OV2

OV1 > UV1

Setting OV2:

Setting UV1:

Setting UV2:

Setting LVDx:

OV2 >= OV1

UV1 >= UV2

UV1 < OV1

UV2 <= UV1

LVDx <= LVRx -2 for 48V, -1 for 24V

LVDx <= Test Volt -1 for 48V, -0.5 for 24V

Setting LVRx: LVRx <= Float -1 for 48V, -0.5 for 24V

LVRx <= EQ -1 for 48V, -0.5 for 24V

LVRx <= Lo Clamp -1 for 48V, -0.5 for 24V

LVRx >= LVDx +2 for 48V, +1 for 24V

Setting Hi Clamp: Hi Clamp > Float

Hi Clamp > Lo Clamp

Hi Clamp <= HVSD -1 for 48V, -0.5 for 24V

Setting Lo Clamp: Lo Clamp < Float

Lo Clamp >= Float - 2.5

Lo Clamp >= LVRx +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

Setting Test Volt:

Setting Test End:

Test Volt <= Test End -0.2

Test Volt >= LVDx +1 for 48V, +0.5 for 24V

Test End >= Test Volt +0.2

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9. Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d on next page)

INFO SCREENS

(Returns to MAIN SCREEN after a preset time period.) Main Screen

Date and time are alternately displayed.

E S C E S C

Float Charge

09:20:20 E N T

E N T

##.#V

Auto

###A

No Alm

E S C

Press or to move to next or previous screen.

E N T

Number of Rec 4

E N T

E N T

E S C

Main Menu

Main Menu

S tatus

Settings

ECO Mode

Manual

Quick Setting

Press or to move cursor in

MAIN MENU screen.

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

Main Menu

S tatus

Settings

ECO Mode

Manual

Quick Setting

E N T

E S C

A

E N T

E S C

Select User

Admin

Enter Password

*

E N T

E S C

*

B

To change the contrast of the LCD display, from the Main Screen, press and hold the Up Arrow (for increasing) or Down Arrow (for decreasing) then press and hold ENT until contrast is as desired.

Release both buttons.

To log out, from the Main Screen, press the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, and ESC at the same time. Release all buttons.

To reset the Controller, from the Main Screen, press ENT and ESC at the same time. Release both buttons.

Main Menu

S tatus

Settings

ECO Mode

Manual

Quick Setting

E N T

E S C

Select User

Admin

Enter Password

*

E N T

E S C

C

*

Main Menu

S tatus

Settings

ECO Mode

Manual

Quick Setting

E N T

E S C

Select User

Admin

Enter Password

*

E N T

E S C

D

*

Local and Remote Access Passwords (set via the Web Interface)

Maximum 13 Characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, _ )

Access Level

Level A (Browser)

Default Password none set

Authority

Browse System Information.

Level B (Operator)

Level C (Engineer) none set none set

Change System Control Settings.

Modify System Parameters.

Download Configuration File.

Level D (Administrator) 1 Update OS Application.

Modify, Add, Delete User Information.

Once a password is entered, it remains in effect for a preset time period to allow navigating between menus without re-entering the password.

A User has access to his/her level menus, plus all menus of the lesser access levels.

Main Menu

S tatus

Settings

ECO Mode

Manual

Quick Setting

E N T

E S C

Select User

Admin

Enter Password

*

E N T

E S C

* Note: Use or to move the cursor to the Select User field. Press ENT to select a different User if required.

To select a User, press ENT to highlight the Select User field, and use or to select a User.

Press ENT to select the User displayed in the Select User field. Note that only

Users programmed into the ACU+ are shown.

Users are programmed via the Web Interface.

Use or to move the cursor to the Enter Password field.

Press ENT to enter a password.

To enter password, press ENT to highlight bit, and use or to choose character. Press ENT to accept and move to the next character. Press ENT again to accept password.

E

*

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

77 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

ENT

A

E N T

Press or to move cursor in

STATUS screen.

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

E S C

Status

Active Alarms

Power System

Rectifier

Battery

DC

AC

EIB

SMDU

Converter

SMDUP

SMTemp

Alarm History

Sys Inventory

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ESC

Active Alarms

Minor:

Major:

Critical:

Temp.

Probes set as

“ambient” show up here.

ESC

Power System

System Voltage

54.0 V

System Load

0.0 A

Mtnc Run Time

1.3 h

Alarm Status

No Alm

Power Split

Master

IB2 T2

21 deg. C

...

SMTemp1 T1

21 deg. C

ESC

Rectifier

Rect Group

Rect #1

Rect #2

0

0

2

ENT

ENT

ENT

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press or to move cursor in menu screen (selects menu item).

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

To View Parameters:

Press or to move up and down list of parameters.

Note:

For a complete list of alarms that can be displayed in the STATUS Active Alarm menus, see the table titled “Available Alarms” in the Operation Chapter.

ESC

Alarm History

Minor:

Major:

Critical:

ESC

SYS Inventory

ACU+

Rect #1

Rect #2

EIB 1

IB 1

SMDUP 1

Conv #1

Conv #2

SMTemp 1

ESC

1 Rect AC

Mains Failure

081104 8:00:12

Critical

Press or to cycle through list of alarms.

Press ESC to return to STATUS menu.

ESC

2 Power System

CAN Comm Fail

081104 8:05:02

Critical

A1 Battery

ESC

ESC

DC

DC Voltage

54.0 V

Total Load Current

0.0 A

Load Current

0.0 A

ESC

A2

ESC

A3

ESC

A4

ESC

A5

ESC

A6

AC

EIB

SMDU

Converter

SMDUP

0

0

1

A7

ESC

ENT

ESC

1 IB2

DI3 Alarm

100629 12:18:35

100629 12:19:52

Press or to cycle through list of alarms.

SMTemp

ENT

ESC

Similar information is displayed for each device in the system.

Device Name

ACU+

Part Number

M820D

Product Ver

001

SW Version

2.25

Serial Number

21024402512

ESC

Rect Group

Average Voltage

52.0 V

Total Current

0.2 A

Number of Rects

2

Num Rects Comm

2

Sys Cap Used

0.9 %

Max Cap Used

3.4 %

Min Cap Used

0.0 %

Rated Voltage

52.0 V

AC Phases

Single Phase

Max Curr Limit

462.2 A

Total Rated Cur

382.0 A

ESC

Rect #1

DC Voltage

53.8 V

DC Current

8.5 A

Temperature

30 deg. C

DC Status

On

AC On/Off

On

Rated Current

35 A

Walk-In

Rectifier ID

Disabled

1

Rect Phase

A

Rectifier SN

010700213

Running Time

200 h

AC Voltage

224 V

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

78 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

A1

ENT

ESC

Battery

Batt Group

Battery 1

Battery 2

LiBattery1

ENT

ENT

ENT

ESC

Batt Group

Battery Voltage

53.8 V

Total Batt Curr

0.0 A

Comp Temp

21 deg. C

Short BOD Time

2 min

ShortBODCounter

8

Long BOD Time

1 min

LongBODCounter

7

Full BOD Time

0 min

FullBODCounter

1

Remaining Time

360.0 hr

LiBatt AvgTemp

20 deg. C

Num Installed

8

NumDisconnected

0

Num No Reply

0

InventUpdating

No

IB2 T1

21 deg. C

...

A4

A5

Temp. Probes set as “battery” show up here.

ENT

ENT

ESC

Battery 1

Battery Voltage

0.0 V

Battery Current

0.0 A

Batt Rating(Ah)

300 Ah

Batt Cap (%)

100.0 %

ESC

SMDU

SMDU Group

SMDU 1

ESC

Converter

Conv Group

Conv #1

Conv #2

ESC

LiBattery1

Batt Voltage

52.3 V

Batt Current

0.0 A

State of Charge

98.8%

Batt Term Volt

52.3 V

Cell Temp

21.0 deg. C

Switch Temp

21.0 deg. C

Batt LED Status

Full Green

A6

ENT

ENT

ESC

SMDUP

SMDUP 1

SMTemp

SMTemp 1

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

A7

A2

ENT

ESC

AC

Rect AC

A3

ENT

ESC

EIB

EIB 1

ENT

ESC

Rect AC

Phase A Voltage

253 V

Phase B Voltage

253 V

Phase C Voltage

254 V

ESC

EIB 1

Load 1 Current

0.0 A

Load 2 Current

0.0 A

Load 3 Current

0.0 A

Block In-Use

8

Voltage 1

0.0 V

Voltage 2

0.0 V

Voltage 3

0.0 V

Voltage 4

0.0 V

Voltage 5

0.0 V

Voltage 6

0.0 V

Voltage 7

0.0 V

Voltage 8

0.0 V

ESC

SMDU Group

Num of SMDUs

1

ESC

SMDU 1

Bus Bar Voltage

54.0 V

Load 1 Current

0.0 A

ESC

Conv Group

Average Voltage

52.0 V

Total Current

0.2 A

Number of Convs

2

Num Convs Comm

2

Rated Voltage

52.0 V

Total Rated Cur xxx.x A

Max Curr Limit

31.3 A

ESC

Conv #1

Output Voltage

48.2 V

Output Current

0.0 A

Temperature

25.0 deg. C

On/Off Status

On

Rated Current xxx.x A

Converter ID

1

Converter SN xxxxxx

Running Time

200 h

ESC

SMDUP 1

Current 1

...

Current 25

0.0 A

0.0 A

Shunt Settable

By Software

ESC

SMTemp

SMTemp1 Temp1

21 deg. C

...

SMTemp1 Temp8

21 deg. C

...

SMTemp8 Temp1

21 deg. C

...

SMTemp8 Temp8

21 deg. C

Temp T1 Status

Normal

...

Temp T8 Status

Normal

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

79 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

B

ENT

ESC

Settings

Alarm Setting

ENT

ENT

Power System

ENT

Rectifier

ENT

Battery

ENT

BattFuseUnit

ENT

DC

ENT

LVD

ENT

AC

ENT

EIB

ENT

SMDU

ENT

Converter

SMTemp

Communication

ENT

ENT

Controller

ENT

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press or to move cursor in menu screen

(selects menu item).

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

To Change a Parameter:

Press or parameters.

to move up and down list of

Press ENT to highlight selected parameter.

Press or to change highlighted value.

Press ENT to make the change.

Press ESC to cancel the change.

The parameter values shown in ( ) are the adjustment range or acceptable values.

Factory default settings are listed in the ACU+

Configuration Drawing (C-dwg) furnished with your system.

ESC

ESC

Communication

DHCP

Disabled

IP Address

126.50.143.70

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.0

Default Gateway

0.0.0.0

Controller

Language

English

Date

2010-06-30

Time

13:04:10

Keypad Voice

On

Reload Config

Yes

Download Config

Yes

Auto Config

Yes

ESC

ESC

ESC

AC

B5

B6

B4

Rect AC

EIB

ESC

Rectifier

All Rect Set

Rect #1

Rect #2

B3 Battery

ESC

ESC

BattFuseUnit

Num of Bat Fuse

0 (0-4)

ESC

DC

Shunt Current

150.0 A (50.0-50000.0)

Shunt Voltage

25.0 mV (1.0-150.0)

LoadShuntExist

No (No / Yes)

SMDU

LVD

ENT

ESC

ESC

ESC

Rect AC

B1

B2

Nominal PH-Volt

Alarm Setting

Power System

ENT

ENT

220 V (50-450)

Mains Fail Alm1

20 % (0.0-100.0)

Mains Fail Alm2

20 % (0.0-100.0)

ESC

All Rect Set

HVSD

Enabled

HVSD Limit

59.0 V

Restart on HVSD

Enabled

HVSD Restart T

Start Interval

300 s

0 s

Walk-In

Walk-In Time

Enabled

8 s

Turn On ACOverV

No

ECO Mode

Disabled

Best Oper Point

80 %

Fluct Range

10 %

Energy Save Pt

45 %

Cycle Period

168 h

Rects ON Time

120 min

Turn Off Delay

5 min

Input Curr Lmt

(enabled / disabled)

(56.0-59.5) (28.0-29.7)

(enabled / disabled)

(0-300)

(0-10)

(enabled / disabled)

(8-128)

(no / yes)

(enabled / disabled)

(30-90)

(1-50)

(10-90)

(1-8760)

(0-255)

(1-60)

30 A

MixHE Power

(1-50)

DG Pwr Lmt

Non-Derate (non-derate / derate)

(disabled / enabled) Enabled

Diesel DI Input

None

DG Pwr Lmt Pt

Current Limit

40.0 %

Disabled

Current Limit Pt

400 A

(none / Digital Input 1 / ... / Digital Input8)

(40-100)

(enabled / disabled)

(dependent on # of rectifiers)

ESC

ESC

Rect #1

Rectifier ID

2

Rect Phase

B

(1-999)

(A / B / C)

B7 SMTemp

ESC

(enabled / disabled)

(on / off)

ESC

Converter

All Conv Set

Conv #1

Conv #2

ENT

ENT

ESC

All Conv Set

Output Voltage

52.0 V

Under Voltage

47.0 V

Over Voltage

56.0 V

Over Current

500 A

HVSD

Enabled

HVSD Limit

Current Limit

59.0 V

Enabled

Current Limit Pt

94 A

ESC

Conv #1

Set Conv ID

1 (1-999)

(48.0-55.5) (24.0-28.0)

(42.0-55.0) (21.0-27.5)

(49.0-59.0) (27.0-30.0)

(1-500)

(enabled / disabled)

(48.0-60.0) (27.0-30.0)

(enabled / disabled)

(dependent on # of converters)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

80 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

B1

ENT

ESC

Alarm Setting

Alm Severity

Alarm Relay

Alarm Param

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press or to move cursor in menu screen (selects menu item).

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

ENT

ENT

ENT

To Change a Parameter:

Press or to move up and down list of parameters.

Press ENT to highlight selected parameter.

Press or to change highlighted value.

Press ENT to make the change.

Press ESC to cancel the change.

The parameter values shown in ( ) are the adjustment range or acceptable values.

Factory default settings are listed in the

ACU+ Configuration Drawing (C-dwg) furnished with your system.

Note:

After setting the Alarm Severity Level, press ENT and together to jump to the related Alarm Relay setting menu for this alarm. Press ENT and together again to return to the previous Alarm Severity

Level screen.

ESC

ESC

Group 2 Rect

Rect Group 3

Group 3 Rect

Rect Group 4

Group 4 Rect

SMDUP

SMBRC Unit

Fuel Tank Grp

Fuel Tank

SMTemp Group

SMTemp 1

SMTemp 2

SMTemp 3

SMTemp 4

SMTemp 5

SMTemp 6

SMTemp 7

SMTemp 8

SMDU 8

Converter Grp

Converter

SMIO 1

SMIO Unit 3

SMIO Unit 4

SMIO Unit 5

SMIO Unit 6

SMIO Unit 7

SMIO Unit 8

LargeDUACDist

AC Distributi

DC Distributi

Dsl Gen Group

Dsl Generator

Rect Group 2

Alm Severity or

Alarm Relay

Power System

Rect Group

Rectifier

Battery Group

Battery

SMDU Battery

EIB Battery

SM Battery

LargeDU Batt

SMBRC Battery

OB Batt Fuse

SMDU Bat Fuse

DC Distr

DC Fuse Unit

SMDU DC Fuse

SMDUP DC Fuse

LVD Unit

SMDU LVD

LargeDU LVD

Rectifier AC

SMAC

IB

EIB

SMDU 1

SMDU 2

SMDU 3

SMDU 4

SMDU 5

SMDU 6

SMDU 7

ESC

Alarm Param

Alarm Voice

On

Block Alarm

Normal

Clr Alm Hist

Yes

Note:

The Alarm Severity and Alarm Relay screens are the same so only one is shown here. Also, the alarms for the Device Groups is lengthy so only part of the alarms for the Rectifier

Device Group is shown. See the table titled

“Available Alarms” in the Operation Chapter for a complete listing of the Device Groups alarms.

ENT

ESC

Rectifier

AC Failure

Major

Rect Temp High

Major

Rect Fault

Major

HVSD

Major

Alarm Severity Screen

(see Available Alarms

Table for complete list of available alarms)

(none / minor / major / critical)

(none / minor / major / critical)

(none / minor / major / critical)

(none / minor / major / critical)

ENT

ESC

Rectifier

AC Failure

Relay #

Rect Temp High

Relay #

Rect Fault

Relay #

HVSD

Relay #

(see Available Alarms

Table for complete list of available alarms)

Alarm Relay Screen

(none / relay 1 / ... / relay 13)

(none / relay 1 / ... / relay 13)

(none / relay 1 / ... / relay 13)

(none / relay 1 / ... / relay 13)

(on / off / 3 min / 10 min / 1 hour / 4 hour)

(normal / blocked)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

81 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

B2

ENT

ESC

Power System

General

Power Split

ENT

ENT

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press or to move cursor in menu screen (selects menu item).

Press or

ESC

Power Split

Slave Curr Lmt

60 %

Delta Volt

0.5 V

Proportion Coeff

Integral Time

30.0

60 s

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

To Change a Parameter:

Press or to move up and down list of parameters.

Press ENT to highlight selected parameter.

to change highlighted value.

Press ENT to make the change.

Press ESC to cancel the change.

The parameter values shown in ( ) are the adjustment range or acceptable values.

Factory default settings are listed in the

ACU+ Configuration Drawing (C-dwg) furnished with your system.

(10-90)

(0.1-2.0)

(0-100)

(10-2000)

Special

Configurations

Only

The temperature monitored by the

Temp. Probe selected here is displayed on the Homepage of the Web Interface.

ESC

General

Auto/Man State

Auto

Manual Mode Lmt

1 h

Mtnc Cycle Time

360 days

EStop/EShutdown

Disabled

Load Curr Alarm

3000 A

Alarm Blocked

Normal

Rect Expansion

Inactive

Address (Slave)

201

Over Voltage 1

57.0 V

Over Voltage 2

58.0 V

Under Voltage 1

48.0 V

Under Voltage 2

44.0 V

Fail Safe enable

Hybrid Mode disable

DG Run Overtemp enable

DG Run Time

60 min

DG Used

DG1

DI for Grid

DI3

DOD

40.0 %

Dsch Duration

12 hours

Start Dsch Time

19 clock

High Load Set

40.0 %

Equal StartTime

8 clock

DG Alarm Delay

60 sec.

Fail Safe

(30-180)

Normally Open (normally open / normally close)

Contactor Mode

(Master Ctrlr / Slave Ctrlr)

Relay Test

Master Ctrlr

Disabled

Relay Test Time

45 sec.

HighLoadLevel1

70%

HighLoadLevel2

(disabled / automatic / individual)

(0-120)

(0-100)

85%

DI1 Alarm State

High

...

DI8 Alarm State

High

Amb Temp Sensor

IB2 T2

(auto / manual)

(0-24)

(10-7200)

(disabled / EStop / EShutdown)

(0-4000)

(normal / blocked)

(inactive / primary / secondary)

(201 / 202 / 203)

(40-60) (20-30)

(40-60) (20-30)

(40-60) (20-30)

(40-60) (20-30)

(disable / enable)

(disable / fixed daily / capacity)

(disable / enable)

(30-120)

(DG1 / DG2 / Both)

(DI1 / ... / DI8)

(20-80)

(1-22)

(0-24)

(20-80)

(0-24)

(0-100)

(Low / High)

(Low / High)

(None / SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... /

SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 /

IB2 T2 / IB2 T1 / System T3 / System T2 / System T1 /

Average / Maximum)

Amb Temp High2

100.0 deg. C

Amb Temp High1

90.0 deg. C

Amb Temp Low

-10.0 deg. C

System Temp1

None

System Temp2

None

System Temp3

None

IB2 Temp1

Battery

IB2 Temp2

Ambient

EIB Temp1

None

EIB Temp2

None

(-40 to +100)

(-40 to +100)

(-40 to +100)

(None / Battery / Ambient)

(None / Battery / Ambient)

(None / Battery / Ambient)

(None / Battery / Ambient)

(None / Battery / Ambient)

(None / Battery / Ambient)

(None / Battery / Ambient)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

82 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

B3

ENT

ESC

Battery

Basic

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press or to move cursor in menu screen (selects menu item).

or

Charge

Test

Temp Comp

Capacity

Battery 1

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

To Change a Parameter:

Press or to move up and down list of parameters.

Press ENT to highlight selected parameter.

Press to change highlighted value.

Press ENT to make the change.

Press ESC to cancel the change.

The parameter values shown in ( ) are the adjustment range or acceptable values.

Factory default settings are listed in the

ACU+ Configuration Drawing (C-dwg) furnished with your system.

ESC

ESC

Test

Test Volt Lmt

45.0 V

Test End Volt

45.2 V

End Test Time

100 min

EndTestCapacity

70 %

RecordThreshold

0.100 V

AC Fail Test

Disabled

Planned Tests

0

Test 1 (M-D Hr)

10-21 10

Const Curr Test

Disabled

ConstCurrT Curr

9999.0 A

Short Test

Disabled

ShortTest Cycle

30 days

Short Test Time

5 min

Max Diff Curr

0.05 C10

BattTestLowCap

99 %

(43.0-53.5) (21.5-27.0)

(43.2-53.5) (21.5-27.0)

(10-1440)

(0-100)

(0.100-1.000)

(disabled / enabled)

(0-12)

(disabled / enabled)

(1-9999)

ESC

Basic

Num Batt Shunts

1

Calc Batt Curr

No

Low Capacity Pt

75 %

Current Limited

No

BTRM TempSensor

IB2 T2

BTRM Temp High2

100.0 deg. C

BTRM Temp High1

90.0 deg. C

BTRM Action

Disabled

BTRM Voltage

51.0 V

ABCL Point

20A

(disabled / enabled)

(1-365)

(1-60)

(0.00-1.00)

(70-100)

ESC

Temp Comp

Temp CompCenter

25.0 deg. C (0.0-40.0)

Temp Comp Coeff

72.0 mV/deg. C (0.0-500.0)

TempComp Sensor

None (None / SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... /

SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 /

IB2 T2 / IB2 T1 / System T3 / System T2 / System T1 /

Average SMBRC / Average / Maximum)

Comp Temp High2

60 deg. C

Comp Temp High1

50 deg. C

Comp Temp Low

-10.0 deg. C

Temp Comp Max V

29.0

Temp Comp Clamp

Enabled

Temp Comp Min V

26.0

(0-100)

(0-100)

(-40 to +100)

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

(disabled / enabled)

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

ESC

Battery 1

Rated Capacity

600.0 Ah

Shunt Current

800.0 A

Shunt Voltage

25.0 mv

(50.0-50000.0)

(50.0-50000.0)

(1.0-150.0)

ESC

Capacity

Charging Eff

96 %

Time 0.1C10

10.00 h

Time 0.2C10

4.90 h

Time 0.3C10

3.00 h

Time 0.4C10

2.00 h

Time 0.5C10

1.40 h

Time 0.6C10

1.20 h

Time 0.7C10

1.10 h

Time 0.8C10

0.90 h

Time 0.9C10

0.70 h

Time 1.0C10

0.50 h

Charge

Float Voltage

54.0 V

EQ Voltage

56.5 V

Batt Curr Limit

0.10 C10

Over Curr Lmt

0.30 C10

Auto EQ

No

EQ Start Curr

0.060 C10

EQ Start Cap

EQ Stop Curr

80.0 %

0.010 C10

EQ Stop Delay

180 min

Maximum EQ Time

1080 min

Cyc EQ

No

Cyc EQ Interval

100 days

Cyc EQ Duration

720 min

(10-100)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0.00-10.00)

(0-2)

(no / yes)

(25-100)

(no / yes)

(None / SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... /

SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 /

IB2 T2 / IB2 T1 / System T3 / System T2 / System T1 /

Average SMBRC / Average / Maximum)

(0-100)

(0-100)

(disabled / lower voltage)

(45-55) (22.5-27.5)

(1-60)

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

(0.10-0.25)

(0.30-1.00)

(no / yes)

(0.040-0.080)

(0-99)

(0.002-0.020)

(0-1440)

(60-2880)

(no/yes)

(2-365)

(30-2880)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

83 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

B4

ENT

ESC

LVD

LVD Group

LVD Unit

SMDU 1 LVD

ENT

ENT

ENT

ESC

LVD Group

HTD Recon Point

38.0 deg. C (20-80)

HTD Point

40.0 deg. C (20-80)

ESC

SMDU 1 LVD

LVD 1

Enable

LVD 1 Mode

Voltage

LVD 1 Voltage

42.0 V

LVD1 Recon Volt

49.0 V

LVD1 ReconDelay

1 min

LVD 1 Time

300 min

LVD1 Dependency

None

LVD 2

Enable

LVD 2 Mode

Voltage

LVD 2 Voltage

42.0 V

LVD2 Recon Volt

49.0 V

LVD2 ReconDelay

1 min

LVD 2 Time

600 min

LVD2 Dependency

None

HTD 1

Disable

HTD 2

Disable

ESC

LVD Unit

LVD1

Enable

LVD1 Mode

LVD1 Volt

Voltage

42.0 V

LVD1 Recon Volt

49.0 V

LVD1 ReconDelay

1 min

LVD1 Time

300 min

LVD1 Dependency

None

LVD2

Enable

LVD2 Mode

LVD2 Volt

Voltage

42.0 V

LVD2 Recon Volt

49.0 V

LVD2 ReconDelay

1 min

LVD2 Time

600 min

LVD2 Dependency

None

HTD1

Disable

HTD2

Disable

LVD Type

Bistable

(enable / disable)

(voltage / time)

(40-60) (20-30)

(40-60) (20-30)

(1-30)

(30-1000)

(none / LVD1 / LVD2)

(enable / disable)

(voltage / time)

(40-60) (20-30)

(40-60) (20-30)

(1-30)

(30-1000)

(none / LVD1 / LVD2)

(enable / disable)

(enabled / disable)

(enable / disable)

(voltage / time)

(40-60) (20-30)

(40-60) (20-30)

(1-30)

(30-1000)

(none / LVD1 / LVD2)

(enable / disable)

(voltage / time)

(40-60) (20-30)

(40-60) (20-30)

(1-30)

(30-1000)

(none / LVD1 / LVD2)

(enable / disable)

(enabled / disable)

B5

B6

B7

ENT

ENT

ENT

ESC

EIB

EIB 1

Displayed when “Voltage Type” set for other then “disable” and

“Block In-Use” set for other then “0”.

EIB 1

Shunt 1 SetAs

Not Used

Shunt 2 SetAs

Not Used

Shunt 3 SetAs

Not Used

Shunt 1 Current

500.0 A

Shunt 1 Voltage

75.0 mV

Shunt 2 Current

500.0 A

Shunt 2 Voltage

75.0 mV

Shunt 3 Current

500.0 A

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

(50.0-50000.0)

(1.0-150.0)

(50.0-50000.0)

(1.0-150.0)

(50.0-50000.0)

Shunt 3 Voltage

75.0 mV (1.0-150.0)

Voltage Type

48 (Block 4) (disable / 24 (block 2) / midpoint / 48 (block 4))

Blk V Diff(12V)

1

Blk V Diff(Mid)

1

Block In-Use

0

(0 - 2)

(0 - 2)

(0-8)

ESC

(bistable / mono-stable / mono w/sample)

ESC

SMDU

SMDU 1

SMTemp

SMTemp 1

SMDU 1

Shunt 1 Voltage

75 mV

Shunt 1 Current

500 A

Shunt 2 Voltage

75 mV

Shunt 2 Current

500 A

Shunt 3 Voltage

75 mV

Shunt 3 Current

500 A

Shunt 4 Voltage

75 mV

Shunt 4 Current

500 A

Shunt 5 Voltage

75 mV

Shunt 5 Current

500 A

Shunt 1 SetAs

Not Used

Shunt 2 SetAs

Not Used

Shunt 3 SetAs

Not Used

Shunt 4 SetAs

Not Used

Shunt 5 SetAs

Not Used

(25-75)

(100-2000)

(25-75)

(100-2000)

(25-75)

(100-2000)

(25-75)

(100-2000)

(25-75)

(100-2000)

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

(Not Used / General / Load / Battery)

SMTemp 1

T1 Assign Equip

Ambient (None / Battery / Ambient)

...

T8 Assign Equip

None (None / Battery / Ambient)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

84 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page, cont’d on next page)

C

ENT

ESC

ECO Mode

ECO Mode

Enabled

Best Oper Point

80 %

Energy Save Pt

45 %

Fluct Range

10 %

Cycle Period

168 hour

Rects ON Time

120 min

Turn Off Delay

5 min

(disabled / enabled)

(30-90)

(10-90)

(1-50)

(1-8760)

(0-255)

(1-60)

ESC

Man/Auto Set

Auto/Man State

Auto

ESC

Power System

Relay Output 1

Active

...

Relay Output 8

Active

Clr MtncRunTime

Yes

*

*

(auto / manual)

(active / not active)

(active/ not active)

D

ENT

ESC

Manual

Man/Auto Set

Power System

Rectifier

Batt Group

LVD

EIB

Converter

SMTemp

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ESC

Rectifier

All Rect Ctrl

Rect #1

Rect #2

ESC

Batt Group

EQ/FLT Control

Float Charge

BattTestControl

Stop

Reset Batt Cap

Yes

Clr Bad Bat Alm

Yes

Clr LiBatt Lost

Clear

ClrLiBatComFail

Clear

Clr AbnlCur Alm

Yes

Clr Cur Imb Alm

Yes

ClrBatTestFail

Yes

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

ENT

ENT

(equalize charge)

(start)

ENT

ESC

LVD

LVD Group

LVD Unit

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press or to move cursor in menu screen (selects menu item).

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

To Change a Parameter:

Press or to move up and down list of parameters.

Press ENT to highlight selected parameter.

Press or to change highlighted value.

Press ENT to make the change.

Press ESC to cancel the change.

The parameter values shown in ( ) are the adjustment range or acceptable values.

Factory default settings are listed in the

ACU+ Configuration Drawing (C-dwg) furnished with your system.

Note

Items marked with an asterisk (*) can be changed while in Auto Mode. Before any other settings in the Manual submenus can be changed, you must first place the controller into Manual Mode. Use the MAN/AUTO SET menu to change the Controller from Auto Mode to Manual Mode.

When you return to Auto Mode, any settings changed in Manual Mode are returned to their previous setting

(setting before being placed in Manual Mode).

ESC

SMTemp

SMTemp Group

SMTemp 1

SMTemp 2

ESC

EIB

EIB 1

ESC

Converter

All Conv Ctrl

Conv #1

Conv #2

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ESC

SMTemp Group

Clr SMTemp Lost

Clear

ESC

SMTemp 1

Clr Probe Alm

Clear *

*

ESC

All Rect Ctrl

Rectifier Trim

53.9 V

DC On/Off Ctrl

Switch On All

AC On/Off Ctrl

Switch On All

Rect LED Ctrl

Stop Flashing

Fan Speed Ctrl

Auto Speed

Confirm ID/PH

Yes

Clear Rect Lost

Clear

Reset Cycle Alm

Clear

Clear Comm Fail

Yes

*

*

*

*

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

(switch off all)

(switch off all)

(all flashing)

(full speed)

ESC

Rect #1

DC On/Off Ctrl

On

AC On/Off Ctrl

On

LED Control

LED Control

Rectifier Reset

Reset

*

(on / off)

(on / off)

(LED control / cancel)

ESC

LVD Unit

LVD1 Control

Connected

LVD2 Control

Connected

(disconnected)

(disconnected)

ESC

EIB 1

Relay Output 9

Active

Relay Output 10

Active

Relay Output 11

Active

Relay Output 12

Active

Relay Output 13

Active

(active/ not active)

(active/ not active)

(active/ not active)

(active/ not active)

(active/ not active)

ESC

All Conv Ctrl

Converter Trim

42.0V

DC On/Off Ctrl

Switch On All

Conv LED Ctrl

Stop Flashing

Fan Speed Ctrl

Auto Speed

Confirm ID

Yes

Clear Conv Lost

Clear

Clear Comm Fail

Yes

ClrAllCommFail

Yes

*

*

*

*

(42.0-58.0) (24.0-28.0)

(Switch Off All / Switch On All)

(All Flashing / Stop Flashing)

(Full Speed / Auto Speed)

ESC

Conv #1

DC On/Off Ctrl

On

Over Volt Reset

On

LED Control

Cancel

(On / Off)

(On / Off)

(Flash / Cancel)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

85 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Figure 9.

Local Menu Flow Diagrams (cont’d from previous page)

E

ENT

ESC

Quick Setting

Auto/Manual

ECO Mode Set

FLT/EQ Volt

FLT/EQ Set

Temp Comp

RectExpansion

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

To Select a Sub-Menu:

Press or to move cursor in menu screen (selects menu item).

Press ENT to enter selected sub-menu.

To Change a Parameter:

Press or to move up and down list of parameters.

Press ENT to highlight selected parameter.

Press or to change highlighted value.

Press ENT to make the change.

Press ESC to cancel the change.

The parameter values shown in ( ) are the adjustment range or acceptable values.

Factory default settings are listed in the

ACU+ Configuration Drawing (C-dwg) furnished with your system.

ESC

Auto/Manual

Auto/Man State

Auto

ESC

ECO Mode Set

ECO Mode

Enabled

Energy Save Pt

45 %

Best Oper Point

80 %

Fluct Range

10 %

Cycle Period

168 hour

Rects ON Time

120 min

Turn Off Delay

5 min

ESC

FLT/EQ Volt

Float Voltage

54.0 V

EQ Voltage

56.5 V

(auto / manual)

(disabled / enabled)

(10-90)

(30-90)

(1-50)

(1-8760)

(0-255)

(1-60)

(42.0-50.0) (21.0-29.0)

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

ESC

FLT/EQ Set

Auto EQ

No

EQ Start Curr

0.060 C10

EQ Start Cap

80.0 %

EQ Stop Curr

0.010 C10

EQ Stop Delay

180 min

Maximum EQ Time

1080 min

Cyc EQ

No

Cyc EQ Interval

100 days

Cyc EQ Duration

720 min

(no / yes)

(0.040-0.080)

(0-99)

(0.002-0.020)

(0-1440)

(60-2880)

(no / yes)

(2-365)

(30-2880)

The temperature monitored by the

Temp. Probe selected here as the TempComp

Sensor is also displayed on the Homepage of the Web Interface as battery temperature.

ESC

Temp Comp

Temp CompCenter

25.0 deg. C

Temp Comp Coeff

(0.0-40.0)

72.0 mV/deg. C (0.0-500.0)

TempComp Sensor

None (None / SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... /

SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 /

IB2 T2 / IB2 T1 / System T3 / System T2 / System T1 /

Average SMBRC / Average / Maximum)

Comp Temp High2

60 deg. C

Comp Temp High1

50 deg. C

Comp Temp Low

-10.0 deg. C

Temp Comp Clamp

Enabled

Temp Comp Max V

29.0

Temp Comp Min V

26.0

(0-100)

(0-100)

(-40 to +100)

(disabled / enabled)

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

(42.0-58.0) (21.0-29.0)

ESC

Rect Expansion

Rect Expansion inactive

Address (Slave)

201

(inactive / primary / secondary)

(201 / 202 / 203)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

86 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Description of Local Display (and Web Interface)

Menus Line Items

The following are descriptions of the editable parameters presented in the local display menus. Parameter descriptions can also be used for the WEB Interface menus. Note that the names in the WEB Interface menus may be longer since the WEB Interface allows more characters to be displayed then the local (LCD) display.

Settings Menu

Alarm Setting

• Block Alarm

• Normal: Alarms are processed normally.

• Blocked: Forces the alarm relays in the "off" state and blocks alarms from changing the relay state.

• Clr Alm Hist: The only selection for "Clr Alm Hist" is Yes.

Once Yes is selected and confirmed, the alarm history log is cleared.

Power System

ALARM SEVERITY MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alm Severity

Note: For WEB Interface, menu item is found under Configuration /

Signal Information Modification / select “Alarm Signal” in “Signal

Type” drop-down box.

"Alarm Severity" Parameter Settings:

• Use the menus to assign an Alarm Severity Level (none, minor, major, critical) to each possible alarm.

ALARM RELAY MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alarm Relay

Note: For WEB Interface, menu item is found under Configuration /

Alarm Relays.

"Alarm Relay" Parameter Settings:

• Use the menus to assign an alarm relay (for connection of external alarm circuits) to each possible alarm.

ALARM PARAM MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Alarm Setting / Alarm Param

Note: For WEB Interface; “Block Alarm” menu item is found under

Device Information / Power System / Settings Tab, “Clr Alarm Hist” menu item is found under Maintenance / Clear Data, and “Alarm

Voice” menu item is not available.

"Alarm Param" Parameter Settings:

• Alarm Voice: Programs the audible alarm feature.

• Off: Disables the audible alarm.

• On: When a new alarm occurs, the audible alarm sounds. Press any key to silence the audible alarm.

• 3 minutes / 10 minutes / 1 hour / 4 hours: When a new alarm occurs, the audible alarm sounds. The audible alarm automatically silences after the selected time period.

GENERAL MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / General

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Power System / Settings Tab.

"General" Parameter Settings:

• Auto/Man State

• Auto: The Controller automatically controls the power system.

• Manual: A User can manually change power system control settings. When you return to Auto Mode, any settings changed in Manual Mode are returned to their previous setting (setting before being placed in

Manual Mode).

• Manual Mode Lmt: Time delay before returning to automatic control after being set for manual control. A

"0" setting disables the "Manual Mode Lmt" feature and the Controller MUST be manually set to Auto control after being set to Manual control.

• Mtnc Cycle Time: The maintenance cycle time is the number of days before a Maintenance Alarm is issued. To reset the maintenance timer and clear the Maintenance

Alarm, clear the Maintenance Run Time (Main Menu /

Manual / Power System / Clr MtncRunTime).

• EStop / EShutdown

• Disabled: Disables the Emergency Stop and

Emergency Shutdown functions.

• EStop: Enables the Emergency Stop function.

• EShutdown: Enables the Emergency Shutdown function.

• Load Curr Alarm: Sets the load current alarm point.

• Alarm Blocked

• Normal: Alarms are processed normally.

• Blocked: Forces the alarm relays in the "off" state and blocks alarms from changing the relay state.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

87 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• Rect Expansion

• Inactive: Select this option if this is the only ACU+

Controller in the power system.

• Primary: Select this option if the power system consists of multiple bays with multiple ACU+

Controllers, and this ACU+ Controller is to be the

Primary Controller. Note that only one (1) ACU+

Controller can be set as the Primary Controller.

• Secondary: Select this option if the power system consists of multiple bays with multiple ACU+

Controllers, and this ACU+ Controller is to be a

Secondary Controller.

_____________________

Up to four (4) ACU+ Controllers can be connected together when a power system requires a greater number of rectifiers than can be controlled by a single

ACU+ Controller. One (1) Controller is designated as the primary Controller, the others as secondary Controllers.

The rectifiers controlled by the secondary Controllers are designated as RectifierGroup 2 through 4 in the menus.

Primary/Secondary Procedure:

Note: Changing the Rectifier Expansion setting may take more than 3 minutes for the ACU+ to configure the feature.

1.

Connect the ACU+ Controllers in the multiple bays via the RS485 interface.

2.

Set one of the ACU+ Controllers as the Primary

Controller via the Rect Expansion menu item in the

Power System "General" Parameters menu.

3.

Set all other ACU+ Controllers as Secondary

Controllers via the Rect Expansion menu item in the

Power System "General" Parameters menu.

4.

Set the Address of the ACU+ Controllers set as

Secondary Controllers to 201, 202, or 203 via the

Address (Slave) menu item in the Power System

"General" Parameters menu. Note that each

Secondary Controller must be set to a different address.

_____________________

• Address (Slave): Sets the address of an ACU+ Controller set as a Secondary Controller.

• Over Voltage 1: Sets the Over Voltage 1 alarm point.

• Over Voltage 2: Sets the Over Voltage 2 alarm point.

• Under Voltage 1: Sets the Under Voltage 1 alarm point.

• Under Voltage 2: Sets the Under Voltage 2 alarm point.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

88

• Fail Safe: When enabled, sets the relay designated as the

"critical summary" alarm relay to operate in the "fail safe" mode. In this mode, the relay is energized during normal operation and de-energized for an alarm condition.

Hybrid Mode: Refer to “Hybrid Control Function” on page

6 for more information on the Hybrid Mode.

• Disable / Fixed Daily / Capacity: Sets the Hybrid

Mode or disables the function.

• DG Run Overtemp: Enables or disables diesel generator operation in an over temperature condition.

• DG Run Time: Sets the diesel generator run time.

• DG Used: Sets the diesel generator(s) to be utilized.

• DI for Grid: Sets the digital input monitoring the grid.

• DOD: Sets the Depth of Discharge.

• Dsch Duration: Sets the discharge duration.

• Start Dsch Time: Sets the start time for discharge.

• High Load Set: Sets the high load point.

• Equal StartTime: Sets the start time for equalizing.

• DG Alarm Delay: Sets the diesel generator alarm delay.

• Fail Safe: Tells the Controller the fail safe mode of the relay contacts connected to start the generator(s) (either normally open or normally close).

• Contactor Mode: Enables or disables the Power Split feature (“master control” indicates the ACU+ system operates normally and “slave control” indicates the ACU+ system is a slave system of the existing legacy system).

See also “Power Split Feature” on page 6.

• Relay Test: Sets the Relay Test feature to Automatic,

Individual, or disables the feature.

• Relay Test Time: Sets the Relay Test Time for the

Automatic Relay Test feature.

• HighLoadLevel1: Sets the High Load Level 1 alarm.

• HighLoadLevel2: Sets the High Load Level 2 alarm.

• DI1 through D18 Alarm State: Sets the alarm state for the digital input (high or low).

• Amb Temp Sensor: Sets the temperature sensor which displays the ambient temperature on the Web Interface’s

Homepage. Note that this temperature sensor MUST be set as an ambient temperature sensor. Select "None", or the temperature probe (SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1

/ ... / SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 /

IB2 T2 / IB2 T1). You can also select Maximum or Average

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014) which takes the maximum or average reading of the temperature probes (any of SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8

T1 / ... / SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 /

IB2 T2 / IB2 T1) set as ambient temperature probes.

• Amb Temp High2: Allows you to set a high ambient temperature alarm 2 point.

• Amb Temp High1: Allows you to set a high ambient temperature alarm 1 point.

• Amb Temp Low: Allows you to set a low ambient temperature alarm point.

• System Temp1: Not used.

• System Temp2: Not used.

• System Temp3: Not used.

• IB2 Temp1: Sets temperature port 1 on the IB2 board to

None, Battery, or Ambient.

• IB2 Temp2: Sets temperature port 2 on the IB2 board to

None, Battery, or Ambient.

• EIB Temp1: Sets temperature port 1 on the EIB board to

None, Battery, or Ambient.

• EIB Temp2: Sets temperature port 2 on the EIB board to

None, Battery, or Ambient.

Note: You can set High2, High1, and Low temperature alarms for each temperature sensor (from the Web Interface).

Note that you cannot set high and low temperature alarms for individual temperature sensors from the Local

Menus. High and low temperature alarm settings for the temperature sensors set as ambient are found in the

Device Information / Power System / Settings tab. High and low temperature alarm settings for the probes set as battery are found in the Device Information / Battery

Group / Settings tab.

POWER SPLIT MENU

See also “Power Split Feature” on page 6.

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Power System / Power Split

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Power System / Settings Tab.

"Power Split" Parameter Settings:

• Slave Curr Lmt: Current limit point for power system designated as the slave system in a "Power Split" configuration.

• Delta Volt: The offset voltage that the power system designated as the slave system in a "Power Split" configuration is set to. It is suggested to leave this value at the default (0.5 volts).

• Proportion Coeff: The proportional coefficient that the power system designated as the slave system in a "Power

Split" configuration is set to. It is suggested to leave this value at the default (30%).

• Integral Time: The integral time that the power system designated as the slave system in a "Power Split" configuration is set to. It is suggested to leave this value at the default (60 seconds).

Rectifier

ALL RECT SET MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Rectifier / All Rect Set

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Rectifier Group / Settings Tab.

"All Rect Set" Parameter Settings:

• HVSD: Enables or disables the High Voltage Shutdown feature for all rectifiers.

• HVSD Limit: Sets the High Voltage Shutdown point for all rectifiers.

• Restart on HVSD: Enables or disables the High Voltage

Shutdown Restart feature for all rectifiers.

• HVSD Restart T: When the High Voltage Shutdown

Restart feature is enabled and the output exceeds the high voltage limit, the rectifiers restart after this time period expires.

• Start Interval: Sets the sequence start interval (time period between starting each rectifier in the system).

• Walk-In: Enables or disables the start-up walk-in feature for all rectifiers.

• Walk-In Time: Sets the walk-in time period for all rectifiers.

• Turn On ACOverV: Enables or disables the "Turn On AC

Over Voltage" feature. When the system is operating on

“week” grid input power (i.e. diesel generator), the input voltage may have a very high peak voltage which may cause a rectifier not to turn on. If “Turn On AC Over

Voltage" feature is enabled, the rectifier is forced to turn on.

• ECO Mode: Enables or disables the Energy Optimization feature for all rectifiers. When enabled, the following parameters can be set.

• Best Oper Point: Percent of full load capacity that the rectifiers operate under in the Energy Optimization mode.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

89 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• Fluct Range: If load fluctuation is less than this value, rectifiers are not turned on or off for Energy

Optimization.

• Energy Save Pt: Energy Optimization is disabled if the load is greater than this setting.

• Cycle Period: This is the time period that rectifiers are turned on and off to maintain an equal operating time for all rectifiers in the system.

• Rects ON Time: Time all rectifiers are turned on at

End of Cycle.

• Turn Off Delay: When the Energy Optimization feature determines a rectifier can be switched off, this is the time delay before the rectifier is switched off.

• Input Curr Lmt: Sets the Input Current Limit point for all rectifiers.

• MixHE Power: Allows the system to use rectifiers of different output capacity. When set to derated power, the output capacity of the higher capacity rectifiers are set to the capacity of the lowest.

• DG Pwr Lmt: Enables or disables the Diesel Power Limit feature. This feature limits rectifier output power to a percentage of maximum when AC input is supplied by a diesel-alternator set.

• Diesel DI Input: Designates which digital input controls operation of the Diesel Power Limit feature.

• DG Pwr Lmt Pt: Sets, as a percentage, the maximum output power at which rectifiers can operate when:

1. the Diesel Power Limit feature is enabled and 2. a digital input signal is received from the connected diesel-alternator set.

• Current Limit: Enables or disables adjusting the output current limit point.

Note: By default this is set to disabled. When disabled, rectifier current limit is set in the rectifier (not via the ACU+) at the maximum current limit point.

• Current Limit Pt: Allows a User to set the output current limit point when the “Current Limit” setting above is set to enabled.

RECT #1 MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Rectifier / Rect #1

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Rectifier Group / Rectifier #1 / Settings Tab.

" Rect #1" Parameter Settings:

• Rectifier ID: Sets the rectifier position in the system.

• Rect Phase: Indicates the phase connected to the rectifier input.

Battery

BASIC MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Basic

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab.

"Basic" Parameter Settings:

• Num Batt Shunts: Sets the number of battery shunts in the system.

• Calc Batt Curr: Selects whether or not the ACU+ calculates the battery current in the case of no battery shunt (load shunt required).

• Low Capacity Pt: Battery low capacity alarm set point.

• Current Limited: Enables or disables battery charge current limit.

• BTRM TempSensor: Sets the BTRM (Battery Thermal

Runaway Management) temperature sensor. Note that this temperature sensor MUST be set as a battery temperature sensor. Select "None", or the temperature probe (SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... / SMTemp1

T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 / IB2 T2 / IB2 T1).

You can also select Maximum or Average which takes the maximum or average reading of the temperature probes

(any of SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... / SMTemp1

T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 / IB2 T2 / IB2 T1) set as battery temperature probes. When used with an SM-

BRC, you can select to average the SM-BRC temperature probe readings.

Note: The BTRM sensor is the sensor which is used for the

High Temperature Disconnect (HTD) Feature.

• BTRM Temp High2: Allows you to set a high BTRM temperature alarm 2 point. If battery temperature exceeds the “BTRM Temp High2” setting, system voltage is lowered to the “BTRM Voltage” setting (if BTRM Action is enabled).

• BTRM Temp High1: Allows you to set a high BTRM temperature alarm 1 point.

• BTRM Action

• Disabled: Disables the Battery Thermal Runaway

Management feature.

• Lower Voltage: Sets the Battery Thermal Runaway

Management feature to reducing the output voltage when battery temperature exceeds the BTRM Temp setting.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

90 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• BTRM Voltage: Voltage that the system is set to when battery temperature exceeds the “BTRM

Temp High2” setting.

• ABCL Point: The ABCL (Active Battery Charge Current

Limit) point is the maximum Li-Ion battery charging current setting.

CHARGE MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Charge

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab.

"Charge" Parameter Settings:

• Float Voltage: Float Charge output voltage setting.

• EQ Voltage: Equalize Charge output voltage setting.

• Batt Curr Limit: Maximum battery charging current setting. For example, a value of 0.150C10 means that the charging current is limited to 15% of the battery’s nominal capacity.

• Over Curr Lmt: Battery over current alarm setting. For example, a value of 0.300C10 means that when the charging current reaches 30% of the battery’s nominal capacity, an alarm will be extended.

• Auto EQ: Enables or disables the Automatic Equalize

Charge feature. When enabled, the following parameters can be set.

• EQ Start Curr: The system is transferred to Equalize

Charge mode when battery charge current increases to this setting. For example, a value of 0.060C10 means that an Automatic Equalize is started if the battery charge current is greater than 6% of the battery’s nominal capacity.

• EQ Start Cap: The system is transferred to Equalize

Charge mode when remaining battery capacity decreases to this setting.

• EQ Stop Curr: When in Equalize Charge mode and the battery charge current decreases below this setting for the "EQ Stop Delay" time period, the system is transferred to Float Charge mode. For example, a value of 0.010C10 means that when the charging current is less than 1% of the battery’s nominal capacity, the system returns to the

Float mode.

• EQ Stop Delay: See "EQ Stop Curr" above.

Note: If the power system has been automatically placed in

Equalize mode, disabling Auto EQ will not return the system to Float mode until the current Equalize cycle is completed. To return immediately to Float mode, navigate as follows: Main Menu / Manual / Batt Group /

“EQ/FLT Control”, and select Float Charge.

• Maximum EQ Time: This is the maximum duration, in minutes, that an Automatic Equalize Charge will last regardless of the other settings.

• Cyc EQ: Enables or disables cyclic (scheduled) Equalize charging. When enabled, the following parameters can be set.

• Cyc EQ Interval: Cyclic (scheduled) Equalize charging interval.

• Cyc EQ Duration: Cyclic (scheduled) Equalize charging duration.

TEST MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Test

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab.

"Test" Parameter Settings:

• Test Volt Lmt: System output voltage setting during a battery discharge test.

• Test End Volt: This is the “end of test voltage level” for battery discharge tests. A battery discharge test will end if battery voltage decreases to this setting.

• End Test Time: This is the "end of test time period” for battery discharge tests. A battery discharge test will end if this time period is exceeded.

• EndTestCapacity: This is the "end of test remaining battery capacity” for battery discharge tests. A battery discharge test will end if remaining battery capacity decreases to this setting. For example, a value of

0.700C10 means that when the discharging current reaches 70% of the battery’s nominal capacity, the battery test is ended.

• RecordThreshold: This setting indicates the interval battery voltage is recorded during a battery discharge test.

• AC Fail Test: Enables or disables starting a battery discharge test during an AC input failure condition.

• Planned Tests: Number of planned battery discharge test per year. A "0" setting disables the planned test feature.

• Test 1 (M-D Hr): Setting for when planned battery discharge test #1 occurs. Note that there can be up to (12) battery discharge tests per year.

• Const Curr Test: Enables or disables a Constant Current

Battery Discharge Test. During this test, the Controller automatically adjusts the rectifiers output voltage to maintain the battery discharge current at a preset value

"ConstCurrT Curr".

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

91 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• ConstCurrT Curr: Constant current setting for a

Constant Current Battery Discharge Test.

• Short Test: Enables or disables a Short Battery Discharge

Test. A Short Battery Discharge Test is a short duration battery discharge test used to verify that parallel batteries are discharging equally. If the discharge current difference between the two batteries exceeds a preset value, an alarm is generated.

Note: This test requires a system with two battery shunts.

• ShortTest Cycle: Short Battery Discharge Test interval.

• Short Test Time: Short Battery Discharge Test duration.

• Max Diff Curr: An alarm is generated if the maximum difference between discharge currents of the two batteries exceeds this limit.

• BattTestLowCap: If remaining battery capacity is less than this value, a battery discharge test will not be started.

TEMP COMP MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Temp Comp

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab.

"Temp Comp" Parameter Settings:

• Temp CompCenter: Sets the temperature at which the system operates at normal voltage levels.

• Temp Comp Coeff: Sets the temperature compensation slope or rate of change per °C above or below the "Temp

Comp" setting. This value is expressed in millivolt per °C per string (mV/°C/str). For example, for a rate of change of 72 mV/°C/str in a 24-cell 48V nominal battery string, the rate of change is 3 mV per cell.

• TempComp Sensor: Select "None" for no temperature compensation, or the temperature probe (SMTemp8 T8 /

... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... / SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 /

EIB T2 / EIB T1 / IB2 T2 / IB2 T1) sensing battery temperature for temperature compensation. You can also select Maximum or Average which takes the maximum or average reading of the temperature probes

(any of SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... / SMTemp1

T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 / IB2 T2 / IB2 T1) set as battery temperature probes. When used with an SM-

BRC, you can select to average the SM-BRC temperature probe readings.

Note: The temperature compensation sensor is also the sensor which displays the battery temperature on the Web Interface’s Homepage.

• Comp Temp High2: Allows you to set a high compensation temperature alarm 2 point.

• Comp Temp High1: Allows you to set a high compensation temperature alarm 1 point.

• Comp Temp Low: Allows you to set a low compensation temperature alarm point.

• Temp Comp Clamp: Enables or disables the temperature compensation voltage clamp feature.

• Temp Comp Max V: Upper voltage limit where battery temperature compensation clamps the voltage.

• Temp Comp Min V: Lower voltage limit where battery temperature compensation clamps the voltage.

CAPACITY MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Capacity

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Group / Settings Tab.

"Capacity" Parameter Settings:

• Charging Eff: Value used to calculate remaining capacity of the battery.

• Time 0.1C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.1C10.

• Time 0.2C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.2C10.

• Time 0.3C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.3C10.

• Time 0.4C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.4C10.

• Time 0.5C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.5C10.

• Time 0.6C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.6C10.

• Time 0.7C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.7C10.

• Time 0.8C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.8C10.

• Time 0.9C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

0.9C10.

• Time 1.0C10: Discharge time with a discharge current of

1.0C10.

BATTERY # MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Battery / Battery #

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Group / Battery # / Settings Tab.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

92 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

"Battery #" Parameter Settings:

• Rated Capacity: Enter the battery string’s rated capacity.

• Shunt Current: Enter the battery string’s shunt current rating.

• Shunt Voltage: Enter the battery string’s shunt voltage rating.

BattFuseUnit

BATTFUSEUNIT MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / BattFuseUnit

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Fuse Group / Battery Fuse Unit / Settings Tab.

"BattFuseUnit" Parameter Settings:

• Num of Bat Fuse: Designates the number of battery fuses in the system.

DC

DC MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / DC

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / DC / Settings Tab.

"DC" Parameter Settings:

• Shunt Current: Enter the load shunt’s current rating.

• Shunt Voltage: Enter the load shunt’s voltage rating.

• LoadShuntExist: Select whether a load shunt exists or not.

LVD

LVD GROUP MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / LVD / LVD Group

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / LVD Group / Settings Tab.

Note: This feature requires a BTRM sensor. The BTRM sensor is the sensor which is used for the High Temperature Disconnect

(HTD) Feature.

"LVD Group" Parameter Settings:

• HTD Recon Point: Sets temperature at which a reconnect will occur following a High Temperature Disconnect.

• HTD Point: Sets high temperature limit at which LVD1 and/or LVD2 contactors will open (disconnect) if the

HTD1 and/or HTD2 features are enabled. If this temperature is reached, a disconnect occurs regardless of voltage.

LVD UNIT MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / LVD / LVD Unit

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / LVD Group / LVD Unit / Settings Tab.

"LVD Unit" Parameter Settings:

• LVD1: Enables or disables LVD1.

• LVD1 Mode: Sets LVD1 to disconnect on a voltage or time setpoint.

• LVD1 Volt: LVD1 low voltage disconnect setting

(when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD1 Recon Volt: LVD1 reconnect setting (when

LVD set for voltage).

• LVD1 ReconDelay: Delay time period until LVD1 reconnects once voltage recovers (when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD1 Time: The time period before LVD1 disconnection once an AC fail condition occurs

(when LVD set for time).

• LVD1 Dependency: Select if LVD1 can disconnect only if LVD2 has disconnected, or none.

• LVD2: Enables or disables LVD2.

• LVD2 Mode: Sets LVD2 to disconnect on a voltage or time setpoint.

• LVD2 Volt: LVD2 low voltage disconnect setting

(when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD2 Recon Volt: LVD2 reconnect setting (when

LVD set for voltage).

• LVD2 ReconDelay: Delay time period until LVD2 reconnects once voltage recovers (when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD2 Time: The time period before LVD2 disconnection once an AC fail condition occurs

(when LVD set for time).

• LVD2 Dependency: Select if LVD2 can disconnect only if LVD1 has disconnected, or none.

• HTD1: Enables or disables the High Temperature 1

Disconnect feature. This feature causes LVD1 contactors to open (disconnect) if a high temperature event occurs.

(See HTD selections in the "LVD Group" Parameter

Settings.)

• HTD2: Enables or disables the High Temperature 2

Disconnect feature. This feature causes LVD2 contactors to open (disconnect) if a high temperature event occurs.

(See HTD selections in the "LVD Group" Parameter

Settings.)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

93 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• LVD Type: Select the type of LVD Contactor. This setting should not be changed.

SMDU 1 LVD MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / LVD / SMDU 1 LVD

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / LVD Group / SMDU 1 LVD / Settings Tab.

"SMDU 1 LVD" Parameter Settings:

• LVD 1: Enables or disables LVD1.

• LVD 1 Mode: Sets LVD1 to disconnect on a voltage or time setpoint.

• LVD 1 Voltage: LVD1 low voltage disconnect setting

(when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD1 Recon Volt: LVD1 reconnect setting (when

LVD set for voltage).

• LVD1 ReconDelay: Delay time period until LVD1 reconnects once voltage recovers (when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD 1 Time: The time period before LVD1 disconnection once an AC fail condition occurs

(when LVD set for time).

• LVD1 Dependency: Select if LVD1 can disconnect only if LVD2 has disconnected, or none.

• LVD 2: Enables or disables LVD2.

• LVD 2 Mode: Sets LVD2 to disconnect on a voltage or time setpoint.

• LVD 2 Voltage: LVD2 low voltage disconnect setting

(when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD2 Recon Volt: LVD2 reconnect setting (when

LVD set for voltage).

• LVD2 ReconDelay: Delay time period until LVD2 reconnects once voltage recovers (when LVD set for voltage).

• LVD 2 Time: The time period before LVD2 disconnection once an AC fail condition occurs

(when LVD set for time).

• LVD2 Dependency: Select if LVD2 can disconnect only if LVD1 has disconnected, or none.

• HTD 1: Enables or disables the High Temperature 1

Disconnect feature. This feature causes LVD1 contactors to open (disconnect) if a high temperature event occurs.

(See HTD selections in the "LVD Group" Parameter

Settings.)

• HTD 2: Enables or disables the High Temperature 2

Disconnect feature. This feature causes LVD2 contactors to open (disconnect) if a high temperature event occurs.

AC

(See HTD selections in the "LVD Group" Parameter

Settings.)

RECT AC MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / AC / Rect AC

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / AC Group / Rect AC / Settings Tab.

"Rect AC" Parameter Settings:

• Nominal PH-Volt: Enter the nominal line-to-neutral voltage (single phase rectifier) or nominal line-to-line voltage (three phase rectifier).

• Mains Fail Alm1: Sets the Mains Fail Alarm 1 value

(percent of nominal).

• Mains Fail Alm2: Sets the Mains Fail Alarm 2 value

(percent of nominal).

Corresponding Alarms:

• Phase A Voltage Low 1 (Nominal Minus "Mains Fail Alarm

1 Percent of Nominal)

• Phase A Voltage Low 2 (Nominal Minus " Mains Fail Alarm

2 Percent of Nominal)

• Phase A Voltage High 1 (Nominal Plus " Mains Fail Alarm 1

Percent of Nominal)

• Phase A Voltage High 2 (Nominal Plus "V Mains Fail Alarm

2 Percent of Nominal)

Phase A used in the example above, Phase B and Phase C are similar.

EIB

EIB 1 MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / EIB / EIB 1

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / EIB Group / EIB 1 / Settings Tab.

"EIB 1" Parameter Settings:

• Shunt # Set As (Not Used, General, Load, Battery): a.

Not Used: Indicates this shunt input is not used. b.

General: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and will not be added to Total DC

Load or Total Battery Load. c.

Load: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and added to the Total DC Load.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

94 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014) d.

Battery: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and added to the Total Battery Load and used with Battery Management.

• Shunt # Current: Enter the shunt 1 current rating.

• Shunt # Voltage: Enter the shunt 1 voltage rating.

• Voltage Type: The EIB assembly provides a total of eight

(8) DC voltage inputs for battery block monitoring. 24

(Block 2) selects the EIB to monitor up to four (4) 24V battery strings with two (2) 12V blocks per string. 48

(Block 4) selects the EIB to monitor up to two (2) 48V battery strings with four (4) 12V blocks per string.

Midpoint selects the EIB to monitor the midpoint voltage of up to eight (8) battery strings for either 24V or 48V systems.

• Blk V Diff(12V): This menu item appears if “24 (Block

2)” or “48 (Block 4)” is selected above. The

“BlockVDiff(12V)” setting above selects the alarm threshold for battery block monitoring. The ACU+ issues an alarm when any block voltage of any battery string has an abnormal value. The alarm is issued when the difference between any block voltage and a reference voltage is greater than the value of the block voltage difference setting.

• Blk V Diff(Mid): This menu item appears if

“Midpoint” is selected above. The “BlockVDiff(Mid)” setting above selects the alarm threshold for battery midpoint monitoring. The ACU+ issues an alarm when any battery midpoint voltage of any battery string has an abnormal value. The alarm is issued when the difference between any battery midpoint voltage and a reference voltage is greater than the value of the block voltage difference setting.

• Block In-Use: Number of 12V battery blocks being used.

SMDU b.

General: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and will not be added to Total DC

Load or Total Battery Load. c.

Load: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and added to the Total DC Load. d.

Battery: Indicates the measurement of the shunt will be displayed and added to the Total Battery Load and used with Battery Management.

Converter

ALL CONV SET MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Converter / All Conv Set

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Converter Group / Settings Tab.

"All Conv Set" Parameter Settings:

• Output Voltage: Sets the output voltage for all converters.

• Under Voltage: Sets the Under Voltage alarm point.

• Over Voltage: Sets the Over Voltage alarm point.

• Over Current: Sets the Over Current alarm point.

• HVSD: Enables or disables the High Voltage Shutdown feature for all converters.

• HVSD Limit: Sets the High Voltage Shutdown point for all converters.

• Current Limit: Enables or disables output current limit.

• Current Limit Pt: Sets the output current limit point.

CONV #1 MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Converter / Conv #1

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Converter Group / Converter #1 / Settings Tab.

" Conv #1" Parameter Settings:

• Set Conv ID: Sets the converter position in the system.

SMTemp

SMDU 1 MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / SMDU / SMDU 1

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / SMDU Group / SMDU 1 / Settings Tab.

"SMDU 1" Parameter Settings:

• Shunt # Voltage: Enter the shunt 1 voltage rating.

• Shunt # Current: Enter the shunt 1 current rating.

• Shunt # Set As (Not Used, General, Load, Battery): a.

Not Used: Indicates this shunt input is not used.

SMTEMP # MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / SMTemp / SMTemp #

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / SM Temp Group / SM Temp # / Setting Tab.

"SMTemp #" Parameter Settings:

• T# Assign Equip: Sets temperature port # on the SM-

Temp # module to None, Battery, or Ambient.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

95 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Note: You can set High2, High1, and Low temperature alarms for each temperature sensor (from the Web Interface).

Note that you cannot set high and low temperature alarms for individual temperature sensors from the Local

Menus. High and low temperature alarm settings for the temperature sensors set as ambient are found in the

Device Information / Power System / Settings tab. High and low temperature alarm settings for the probes set as battery are found in the Device Information / Battery

Group / Settings tab.

Communication

COMMUNICATION MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Communication

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under

Maintenance / Network Configuration.

"Communication" Parameter Settings:

• DHCP: The DHCP function allows the Controller to acquire an IP address automatically. This function can only be enabled or disabled via the local LCD display and keypad. If this function is enabled and the acquisition of an IP address fails, an alarm is generated. If the acquisition of an IP address is successful, you need to record the IP address automatically acquired by the

Controller to access the Controller via the Web Interface.

• IP Address: Sets the Controller's IP address.

Enter the address in the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where

0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.

The address must be a valid address and must not be

255.255.255.255.

• Subnet Mask: Sets the Controller's network netmask.

Enter the address in the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where

0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.

• Default Gateway: Sets the Controller's gateway address.

Enter the address in the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where

0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.

This is the address of the gateway of the network on which the Controller resides.

The address must be a valid address and must not be

255.255.255.255.

Controller

CONTROLLER MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Settings / Controller

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under the

Maintenance and Configuration menus.

"Controller" Parameter Settings:

• Language: Select the language the menus are displayed in.

• Date: Sets the date.

• Time: Sets the time.

• Keypad Voice: Sets the keypad sound on or off.

• Reload Config: Reloads the configuration that resides in memory (restores factory defaults).

• Download Config: Downloads a configuration package into the Controller.

• Auto Config: Auto configures the Controller for the devices connected to it.

ECO MODE (ENERGY OPTIMIZATION) MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / ECO Mode

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / ECO Mode Setting.

"ECO Mode" Parameter Settings:

• ECO Mode: Enables or disables the Energy Optimization

Mode feature for all rectifiers. When enabled, the following parameters can be set.

• Best Oper Point: Percent of full load capacity that the rectifiers operate under in the Energy Optimization mode.

• Energy Save Pt: Energy Optimization is disabled if the load is greater than this setting.

• Fluct Range: If load fluctuation is less than this value, rectifiers are not turned on or off for Energy

Optimization.

• Cycle Period: This is the time period that rectifiers are turned on and off to maintain an equal operating time for all rectifiers in the system.

• Rects ON Time: Time all rectifiers are turned on at

End of Cycle.

• Turn Off Delay: When the Energy Optimization feature determines a rectifier can be switched off, this is the time delay before the rectifier is switched off.

Manual Menu

Note: Menu items shown with an asterisk (*) can be changed while in Auto Mode. Before any other settings in this section can be changed, you must first place the ACU+ in the Manual mode.

See "’Man/Auto Set Parameter Settings" for a procedure.

Items that can only be changed in the Manual mode will revert to their previous settings when the Controller is returned to the

Auto mode.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

96 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Man/Auto Set

MAN/AUTO SET MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / "Man/Auto Set"

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / “Auto/Manual Setting”.

"Man/Auto Set" Parameter Settings:

• Auto/Man State*

• Auto: The Controller automatically controls the power system.

• Manual: A User can manually change certain power system control settings via the following menus.

(See Note above.) This provides a convenient means of making temporary adjustment changes for testing purposes.

Power System

POWER SYSTEM MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Power System

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Power System / select the Control tab.

"Power System" Parameter Settings:

• Relay Output 1 through 8: Temporarily sets the relay to active or not active. Setting reverts to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• Clr MtncRunTime*: The only selection for "Clear

Maintenance Run Time" is Yes. Once Yes is selected and confirmed, the Power System’s Maintenance Run Time log is cleared.

Rectifier

ALL RECT CTRL MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Rectifier / All Rect Ctrl

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Rectifier Group / select the Control tab.

"All Rect Ctrl" Parameter Settings:

• Rectifier Trim: Temporarily sets the output voltage for all rectifiers. Voltage can be increased or decreased from the existing Float Charge or Equalize Charge setting, depending which mode the Controller was in when set to

"Manual". Setting reverts to original when Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• DC On/Off Ctrl: Temporarily turns the DC output on or off for all rectifiers. Setting returns to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• AC On/Off Ctrl: Temporarily turns the AC input on or off for all rectifiers. Setting returns to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• Rect LED Ctrl: Temporarily sets whether or not a rectifier’s local power indicator blinks when the

Controller is communicating with the rectifier. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the

Auto mode.

• Fan Speed Ctrl: Temporarily sets the fan speed for all rectifiers. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• Confirm ID/PH*: Confirms the position and input phase for all rectifiers.

• Clear Rect Lost*: Clears a rectifier lost alarm.

• Reset Cycle Alm*: Clears a rectifier oscillator alarm.

• Clear Comm Fail*: Clears a rectifier communication fail alarm.

RECT #1 MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Rectifier / Rect #1

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Rectifier Group / Rectifier #1 / select the Control tab.

"Rect #1" Parameter Settings:

• DC On/Off Ctrl: Temporarily turns the rectifier’s DC output on or off. Setting returns to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• AC On/Off Ctrl: Temporarily turns the rectifier’s AC input on or off. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• LED Control: Temporarily sets whether or not the rectifier’s local power indicator blinks when the

Controller is communicating with the rectifier. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the

Auto mode.

• Rectifier Reset*: Resets the rectifier.

Batt Group

BATT GROUP MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Batt Group

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Battery Group / select the Control tab.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

97 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

"Batt Group" Parameter Settings:

• EQ/FLT Control*: Places the system in Equalize Charge or

Float Charge mode.

• BattTestControl*: Starts or stops a Battery Test.

• Reset Batt Cap*: Resets the battery capacity calculation.

• Clr Bad Bat Alm*: Clears a bad battery alarm.

• Clr LiBatt Lost*: Clears a Li-Ion battery lost alarm.

• ClrLiBatComFail*: Clears a Li-Ion battery communications fail alarm

• Clear AbnlCur Alm*: Clears an abnormal current alarm.

• Clear Cur Imb Alm*: Clears a current imbalance alarm.

• ClrBatTestFail*: Clears a battery test fail alarm.

LVD

LVD UNIT MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / LVD / LVD Unit

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / LVD Group / LVD Unit / select the Control tab.

"LVD Unit" Parameter Settings:

• LVD1 Control: Temporarily connects or disconnects

LVD1. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• LVD2 Control: Temporarily connects or disconnects

LVD2. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

EIB

EIB 1 MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / EIB / EIB1

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / EIB Group / EIB 1 / select the Control tab.

"EIB 1" Parameter Settings: (EIB1 refers to the first Extended

Interface Board (EIB) in the system.))

• Relay Output 9 through 13: Temporarily sets the relay to active or not active. Setting returns to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

Converter

"All Conv Ctrl" Parameter Settings:

• Converter Trim: Temporarily sets the output voltage for all converters. Setting reverts to original when Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• DC On/Off Ctrl: Temporarily turns the DC output on or off for all converters. Setting returns to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• Conv LED Control: Temporarily sets whether or not a converter’s local power indicator blinks when the

Controller is communicating with the converter. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the

Auto mode.

• Fan Speed Ctrl: Temporarily sets the fan speed for all converters. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• Confirm ID *: Confirms the position for all converters.

• Clear Conv Lost*: Clears a converter lost alarm.

• Clear Comm Fail*: Clears a converter communication fail alarm.

• ClrAllCommFail*: Clears all converter communication fail alarms.

CONV #1 MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Converter / CONV 1

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Converter Group / Converter #1 / select the Control tab.

"CONV #1" Parameter Settings:

• DC On/Off Ctrl: Temporarily turns the converter’s DC output on or off. Setting returns to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• Over Volt Reset: Temporarily sets the converter’s over voltage reset feature. Setting returns to original when

Controller is returned to the Auto mode.

• LED Control: Temporarily sets whether or not the converter’s local power indicator blinks when the

Controller is communicating with the converter. Setting returns to original when Controller is returned to the

Auto mode.

SMTemp

ALL CONV CTRL MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / Converter / All Conv Ctrl

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / Converter Group / select the Control tab.

SMTEMP GROUP MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / SMTemp / SMTemp Group

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / SM Temp Group / Control Tab.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

98 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

"SMTemp Group" Parameter Settings:

• Clr SMTemp Lost*: Clears an SMTemp lost alarm.

SMTEMP # MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Manual / SMTemp / SMTemp #

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Device

Information / SM Temp Group / SM Temp # / Control Tab.

"SMTemp #" Parameter Settings:

• Clr Probe Alm*: Clears an SMTemp probe fail alarm.

Quick Setting Menu

Auto/Manual

• Cycle Period: This is the time period that rectifiers are turned on and off to maintain an equal operating time for all rectifiers in the system.

• Rects ON Time: Time all rectifiers are turned on at

End of Cycle.

• Turn Off Delay: When the Energy Optimization feature determines a rectifier can be switched off, this is the time delay before the rectifier is switched off.

FLT/EQ Volts

AUTO/MANUAL MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Quick Setting / "Auto/Manual"

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / “Auto/Manual Setting”.

"Auto/Manual" Parameter Settings:

• Auto/Man State

• Auto: The Controller automatically controls the power system.

• Manual: A User can manually change certain power system control settings via the Manual menu. (See

“Manual Menu” on page 96.) This provides a

convenient means of making temporary adjustment changes for testing purposes.

ECO Mode Set

ECO MODE SET MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Quick Setting / ECO Mode Set

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / “ECO Mode Setting.

"ECO Mode Set" Parameter Settings:

• ECO Mode: Enables or disables the Energy Optimization

Mode feature for all rectifiers. When enabled, the following parameters can be set.

• Energy Save Pt: Energy Optimization is disabled if the load is greater than this setting.

• Best Oper Point: Percent of full load capacity that the rectifiers operate under in the Energy Optimization mode.

• Fluct Range: If load fluctuation is less than this value, rectifiers are not turned on or off for Energy

Optimization.

FLT/EQ VOLTS MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Quick Setting / “FLT/EQ Voltag”

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / “Float/Equalize Charge Voltage”.

"FLT/EQ Volts" Parameter Settings:

• Float Voltage: Float Charge output voltage setting.

• EQ Voltage: Equalize Charge output voltage setting.

FLT/EQ Set

FLT/EQ SET MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Quick Setting / "FLT/EQ Set"

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / “Float/Equalize Settings”.

"FLT/EQ Set" Parameter Settings:

• Auto EQ: Enables or disables the Automatic Equalize

Charge feature. When enabled, the following parameters can be set.

• EQ Start Curr: The system is transferred to Equalize

Charge mode when battery charge current increases to this setting. For example, a value of 0.060C10 means that an Automatic Equalize is started if the battery charge current is greater than 6% of the battery’s nominal capacity.

• EQ Start Cap: The system is transferred to Equalize

Charge mode when remaining battery capacity decreases to this setting.

• EQ Stop Curr: When in Equalize Charge mode and the battery charge current decreases below this setting for the "EQ Stop Delay" time period, the system is transferred to Float Charge mode. For example, a value of 0.010C10 means that when the charging current is less than 1% of the battery’s nominal capacity, the system returns to the Float mode.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

99 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• EQ Stop Delay: See "EQ Stop Curr" above.

Note: If the power system has been automatically placed

in Equalize mode, disabling Auto EQ will not return the system to Float mode until the current Equalize cycle is completed. To return immediately to Float

mode, navigate as follows: Main Menu / Manual /

Batt Group / EQ/FLT Control, and select Float

Charge.

• Maximum EQ Time: This is the maximum duration, in minutes, that an Automatic Equalize Charge will last regardless of the other settings.

• Cyc EQ: Enables or disables cyclic (scheduled) Equalize charging. When enabled, the following parameters can be set.

• Cyc EQ Interval: Cyclic (scheduled) Equalize charging interval.

• Cyc EQ Duration: Cyclic (scheduled) Equalize charging duration.

Temp Comp

Note: The temperature compensation sensor is also the sensor which displays the battery temperature on the Web Interface’s Homepage.

• Comp Temp High2: Allows you to set a high compensation temperature alarm 2 point.

• Comp Temp High1: Allows you to set a high compensation temperature alarm 1 point.

• Comp Temp Low: Allows you to set a low compensation temperature alarm point.

• Temp Comp Clamp: Enables or disables the temperature compensation voltage clamp feature.

• Temp Comp Max V: Upper voltage limit where battery temperature compensation clamps the voltage.

• Temp Comp Min V: Lower voltage limit where battery temperature compensation clamps the voltage.

Rectifier Expansion

TEMP COMP MENU

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Quick Setting / Temp Comp

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / Temp Compensation Setting.

"Temp Comp" Parameter Settings:

• Temp CompCenter: Sets the temperature at which the system operates at normal voltage levels.

• Temp Comp Coeff: Sets the temperature compensation slope or rate of change per °C above or below the "Temp

Comp" setting. This value is expressed in millivolt per °C per string (mV/°C/str). For example, for a rate of change of 72 mV/°C/str in a 24-cell 48V nominal battery string, the rate of change is 3 mV per cell.

• TempComp Sensor: Select "None" for no temperature compensation, or the temperature probe (SMTemp8 T8 /

... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... / SMTemp1 T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 /

EIB T2 / EIB T1 / IB2 T2 / IB2 T1) sensing battery temperature for temperature compensation. You can also select Maximum or Average which takes the maximum or average reading of the temperature probes

(any of SMTemp8 T8 / ... / SMTemp8 T1 / ... / SMTemp1

T8 / ... / SMTemp1 T1 / EIB T2 / EIB T1 / IB2 T2 / IB2 T1) set as battery temperature probes. When used with an SM-

BRC, you can select to average the SM-BRC temperature probe readings.

RECTIFIER EXPANSION MENU

Up to four (4) ACU+ Controllers can be connected together when a power system requires a greater number of rectifiers than can be controlled by a single ACU+ Controller. One (1) Controller is designated as the primary Controller, the others as secondary

Controllers. The rectifiers controlled by the secondary Controllers are designated as RectifierGroup 2 through 4 in the menus.

Primary/Secondary Procedure:

Note: Changing the Rectifier Expansion setting may take more than

3 minutes for the ACU+ to configure the feature.

1.

Connect the ACU+ Controllers in the multiple bays via the

RS485 interface.

2.

Set one of the ACU+ Controllers as the Primary Controller

(see below).

3.

Set all other ACU+ Controllers as Secondary Controllers

(see below).

4.

Set the Address of the ACU+ Controllers set as Secondary

Controllers to 201, 202, or 203 (see below). Note that each Secondary Controller must be set to a different address.

Menu Navigation:

Main Menu / Quick Setting / Rectifier Expansion

Note: For WEB Interface; menu items are found under Quick

Settings / Rectifier Expansion.

"Rectifier Expansion" Parameter Settings:

• Rect Expansion

• Inactive: Select this option if this is the only ACU+

Controller in the power system.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

100 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

• Primary: Select this option if the power system consists of multiple bays with multiple ACU+

Controllers, and this ACU+ Controller is to be the

Primary Controller. Note that only one (1) ACU+

Controller can be set as the Primary Controller.

• Secondary: Select this option if the power system consists of multiple bays with multiple ACU+

Controllers, and this ACU+ Controller is to be a

Secondary Controller.

• Address (Slave): Sets the address of an ACU+ Controller set as a Secondary Controller.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

101 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

WEB Interface Menus

Overview

This section provides descriptions of the WEB Interface Menus. Refer also to “Passwords and Access Levels” on page 12 and “WEB

Interface Access” on page 14. For parameter descriptions, refer to “Description of Local Display (and Web Interface) Menus Line Items”

on page 87. For Local Display Menus, refer to “Local Display Menus” on page 75.

Homepage

In the WEB Interface, after entering a valid User Name and Password and clicking LOGIN , the "HOMEPAGE" window opens. See also

“Logging into the Controller” on page 17.

System Status Area

Menu

Navigation

Area

Load Trend Area

The homepage window is divided into three areas: System Status, Load Trend, and Menu Navigation.

System Status Area

System status is displayed in this area (top right section of Homepage window).

Load Trend Area

A load trend visual is displayed in this area (bottom right section of Homepage window).

Menu Navigation Area

Available menus are displayed in this area (left section of Homepage window).

When you click on a menu name in this area, the menu opens in the right section of the window (replacing the system status and load trend screens).

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

102 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

When the system is in an alarm state, a fourth area (Alarms) appears at the bottom of the display.

Alarms Area

Alarms are displayed in this area (bottom right section of Homepage window).

System Status Area

Menu

Navigation

Area

Ambient

Temperature

Load Trend Area

(use scroll bar to view)

Alarms Area

Battery

Temperature

Temperature Readings

• The temperature sensor set as the “Amb Temp Sensor” in the Power System menu is the sensor which displays the ambient temperature on the Web Interface’s Homepage.

• The temperature compensation sensor is the sensor which displays the battery temperature on the Web Interface’s Homepage.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

103 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Menu Navigation Window

When a menu is clicked on in the left side of the window (menu navigation area), the menu selected is displayed in the top right section of the window (the system status and load trend screens are replaced with a selected menu screen). Note that there is a menu item named SYSTEM STATUS to return to the system status screen.

Selected Menu Area

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

104 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Alarms

The bottom right section of the window shows any alarms active in the power system.

When viewing the alarms, click the “arrow” icon to collapse the alarm list. Click the "arrow" icon again to expand the alarm list. Also located next to the “arrow” icon is a check box named “Auto Popup”. When this box is checked and the alarm window is collapse, a new alarm will cause the alarm window to open.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

105 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

The alarms area contains tabs to allow viewing all alarms or a type of alarm (severity). For example, click the Minor tab to display alarms set as Minor alarms.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

106 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Device Information Menu

Listed in this menu are the device groups installed in the system. Click on a device group to view its current or logged operating parameters, set programmable parameters, and change control settings.

The following sections describe the Rectifier and Battery device groups as samples of how to use these menus.

Rectifier Group

The “Rectifier Group” menu contains three tabs: Status, Control, and Settings.

Status Tab

This tab displays the actually sampled values such as “Number of Rectifiers”, “Total Current”, and so on.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

107 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Control Tab

This tab displays the rectifier’s control settings and allows you to change these settings. For example, a User can select a value of “Full

Speed” for “Fan Speed Control” then click on “Set” to make the rectifier’s fan run at full speed. The control command is effective for all the rectifiers.

Note: Settings that appear "grayed out" can only be made when the Controller is in the "manual control" state. If the Controller is set for

"automatic" control, change the “Auto/Man State” setting first to the “Man” setting.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

108 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Settings Tab

This tab displays the rectifier’s programmable settings and allows you to change these settings. For example, a User can select a value of

“Disabled” for “Walk-In” then click on “Set” to disable the walk-in function of all the rectifiers.

Note: Settings that appear "grayed out" can only be made when the Controller is in the "manual control" state. If the Controller is set for

"automatic" control, change the “Auto/Man State” setting first to the “Man” setting.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

109 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

SELECTING AN INDIVIDUAL RECTIFIER FROM THE RECTIFIER GROUP

Expanding the Rectifier Group menu selection in the left pane lists the individual rectifiers installed in the system in sub-menus. Click on an individual rectifier listed in the sub-menus in the left pane to display its menu screen in the right pane.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

110 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

An “Individual Rectifier” menu also contains the three tabs: Status, Control, and Settings. The menu items in each of these tabs are specific to the rectifier selected. For example, clicking the Control tab displays the control settings for the selected rectifier.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

111 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Battery Group (except Li-Ion Battery Configuration)

The “Battery Group” menu contains three tabs: Status, Control, and Settings.

Status Tab

This tab displays the actually sampled values such as “Battery Voltage” and “Total Battery Current”.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

112 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Control Tab

This tab displays the battery’s control settings and allows you to change these settings. For example, a User can select a value of “Equalize

Charge” for “Equalize/Float Charge Control” then click on “Set” to change the charge mode from float to equalize.

Note: Settings that appear "grayed out" can only be made when the Controller is in the "manual control" state. If the Controller is set for

"automatic" control, change the “Auto/Man State” setting first to the “Man” setting.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

113 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Settings Tab

This tab displays the battery’s programmable settings and allows you to change these settings. For example, a User can select a value of

“Yes” for “Automatic Equalize” then click on “Set” to make the setting become effective.

Note: Settings that appear "grayed out" can only be made when the Controller is in the "manual control" state. If the Controller is set for

"automatic" control, change the “Auto/Man State” setting first to the “Man” setting.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

114 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

SELECTING AN INDIVIDUAL BATTERY STRING FROM THE BATTERY GROUP

Expanding the Battery Group menu selection in the left pane lists the individual battery strings installed in the system in sub-menus. Click on an individual battery string listed in the sub-menus in the left pane to display its menu screen in the right pane.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

115 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

An “Individual Battery String” menu also contains the three tabs: Status, Control, and Settings. The menu items in each of these tabs are specific to the battery string selected. For example, clicking the Settings Tab displays the programmable settings for the selected battery string. Note that if you click the Control tab, nothing will be displayed because the Controller is not allowed to control a single battery string or set the values of a single battery string.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

116 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Battery Group (Li-Ion Battery Configuration)

Status Tab

Control Tab

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

117 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Settings Tab

Individual Battery

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

118 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Quick Settings Menu

The various settings presented in the other menus are grouped here by function as a convenient way to program these features.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

119 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Query Menu

Alarm History Log Sub-Menu

Select the "Device" to query from the drop-down list box. Enter the "from" and "to" time. Click “Query” to query for alarms within this time slot.

To save the log to your hard drive (in text [.txt] format), click “Upload” and select the path.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

120 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Data History Log Sub-Menu

Select the "Device" to query from the drop-down list box. Enter the "from" and "to" time. Click “Query” to query for data within this time slot.

To save the log to your hard drive (in text [.txt] format), click “Upload” and select the path.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

121 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Control/System/Diesel Log Sub-Menu

Select the type of log to query from the drop-down list box. Enter the "from" and "to" time. Click “Query” to query for data within this time slot.

To save the log to your hard drive (in text [.txt] format), click “Upload” and select the path.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

122 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Battery Test Log Sub-Menu

Select the battery test to query from the drop-down list box. Battery test #1 is the most recent. Click “Query” to query for the battery test results.

To save the log to your hard drive (in text [.txt] format), click “Upload” and select the path.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

123 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Maintenance Menu

Network Configuration Sub-Menu

You can configure the Controller’s network parameters; such as the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. After modifying the network parameters, click “Save Parameter” to validate the change made to the parameters.

Note: After changing the IP Address, you will need to login again with the new IP address.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

124 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

NMSV2 (Network Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu (versions 1 and 2)

Configures SNMP Version 1 and 2 parameters.

You can configure the NMS IP, authority, and trap level. You can also add new NMS, modify NMS information, and delete the selected

NMS through the interface. You can also set the trap level.

• NMS IP: The permitted IP to access the V2 agent.

• Public Community: The public community string.

• Private Community: The private community string.

Note: Only listed IP Addresses will have SNMP access.

Note: Use the “Change Trap” button to enable SNMP V2 and V3 traps.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

125 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

NMSV3 (Network Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu (version 3)

Configures SNMP Version 3 parameters.

You can configure the User Name, Trap IP Address, Priv Password DES, Auth Password MD5, and Trap Security Level.

• User Name: The permitted User to access the V3 agent.

• Trap IP Address: The IP to which the trap is sent.

• Priv Password DES: The private DES password used to encrypt the data.

• Auth Password MD5: The authorization MD5 password used to encrypt the digital signature.

• Trap Security Level: The SNMP v3 data security level (NoAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, or AuthPriv).

• NoAuthNoPriv: SNMP messages are sent without authentication and without privacy.

• AuthNoPriv: SNMP messages are sent with authentication but without privacy.

• AuthPriv: SNMP messages are sent with authentication and with privacy.

Note: Use the “Change Trap” button in the NMSV2 screen to enable SNMP V2 and V3 traps.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

126 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

HLMS (High Level Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu

For use with HLMS supporting the YDN23 protocol.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

127 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Edit PowerSplit Sub-Menu

You can configure the PowerSplit parameters and associated digital input signals.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

128 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

User Information Settings Sub-Menu

You can add, edit, and delete Users. These are the Users that can log onto the Controller both locally (local display access) or remotely using the Web Interface.

Adding a User

1.

Enter the User’s Name in the “User Name” field (13 characters maximum; the valid characters are 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and _ ).

2.

Select the authority of the User from those listed in the "Authority" drop-down list box. See "User Authority Level" below for a description.

3.

Enter a password for this User in the "Password" field (13 characters maximum; the valid characters are 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and _ ).

4.

Re-enter the password for this User in the "Confirm" field.

5.

Click the “Add New User” button to add the User.

Modifying an Existing User

1.

Select the User to be modified from those listed in the "Current Users" list.

2.

Modify the parameters of this User in the "User Name", "Authority", and/or "Password" field.

3.

Click the “Modify User” button to modify the parameters of this User.

Deleting a User

1.

Select the User to be deleted from those listed in the "Current Users" list.

2.

Click the “Delete Selected User” button to delete this User.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

129 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

User Authority Level

A User is assigned one of the following "Authority Levels".

Each Authority Level gives a User access to specific menus. A User has access to his/her level menus, plus all menus of the lesser authority levels.

Authority Level

Browser

Operator

User Authority

The User can only read (browse) information in the menus.

The User has access to the system "Control" menus.

Engineer

Administrator

The User has access to the system "Setting" menus and can download the configuration package.

The User has full access to all menus; including update the OS application and modifying, adding, and deleting Users.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

130 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Clear Data Sub-Menu

Select the data log to be cleared from those listed in the drop-down list box. Click on the “Clear” button to clear the corresponding data.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

131 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Restore Defaults Sub-Menu (Reloading the Configuration Package Stored in the ACU+ Controller)

See also “Reloading the Configuration Package Stored in the ACU+ Controller” on page 29.

This procedure is typically used to restore any changes you made to the relay assignments, alarm severities, signal names, or PLC expressions. This file is not shipped with the system. There are one or two steps required to restore your ACU+ as shipped.

• One step to reload the ACU+ configuration package (required only if you made any changes to relay assignments, alarm severities, signal names, or PLC expressions).

• One step to reload the "SettingParam.run" file (required only if you made any setting changes like float/ equalize voltage or alarm thresholds).

Your system may have been configured for specific options at the factory which creates a “SettingParam.run” file. Reloading the configuration (restoring defaults) will return the system to the settings of the default configuration package. These are the settings before specific options may have been configured by the factory. To restore the system to the settings as shipped, after reloading the configuration (restoring defaults), you must reload the factory provided “SettingParam.run” file.

Note: If a system was shipped with factory modified settings, the system is supplied with a USB memory device that contains a

“SettingParam.run” file as shipped. The “SettingParam.run” file has a seven-digit UIN (Unique Identification Number) preceding the

“SettingParam.run” filename. The UIN identifies a “SettingParam.run” file for use with a specific system. This file can be used to

restore your system to the configuration as shipped. Refer to “Reloading a Backed-Up ACU+ Configuration” on page 27 to reload the

supplied “SettingParam.run” file.

PROCEDURE

Warning

WARNING! When this procedure is performed, the Controller’s existing configuration and parameter settings will be lost. The

“SettingParam.run” file is deleted. Before reloading the configuration (restoring defaults), if you have made changes to any setting save the “SettingParam.run” file or if you have made any name changes, relay assignments, alarm severities, or PLC

expressions save the configuration package (see Backing Up the ACU+ Configuration on page 26).

AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE, RELOAD THE “SETTINGPARAM.RUN” FILE AND CONFIGURATION PACKAGE, IF REQUIRED.

Click on the “Restore Defaults” button. Click “OK” to confirm to overwrite the existing configuration package in memory with the stored configuration package. The controller will automatically reboot. All settings WILL BE restored to the defaults of the stored configuration package.

Note: After rebooting, you must exit your browser and re-login to see any changes made.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

132 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

133 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Download/Upload Sub-Menu

See also “Backing Up the ACU+ Configuration” on page 26, “Reloading a Backed-Up ACU+ Configuration” on page 27, and “Upgrading the ACU+ Using an Application ("All") Package” on page 28.

You can download (from your hard drive into the Controller) a configuration package, application ("All") package, language package

(filename of each has a tar or tar.gz extension), or “SettingParam.run file”.

You can upload (from the Controller to your hard drive) a configuration package or language package.

To upload or download a file, you need to shut down the Controller first. When you select the "Download" submenu, the "Stop Controller" window opens. Click on the “Stop Controller” button.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

134 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

The following window opens.

Warning

WARNING! Never navigate from this web page without first clicking on "Start Controller". If you do, you will not have web access. A manual system reset is required to restore web access.

• To download a configuration package, application ("ALL") package, or a "SettingParam.run" file to the controller; click the

"Browse…." button and navigate to the folder where the file to download is located. Select the file to be downloaded and then click the "Download" button. Click "Start Controller" to restart the Controller with the downloaded file installed.

• To upload a file to your computer, select "Configuration Package" or "Language Package" from the "File in Controller" drop-down list box, and click on the "Upload" button to save the file to your computer. Click "Start Controller" to restart the Controller.

Note: Ensure Internet Explorer security settings are set to enable a file to be copied to your computer.

Note: A Configuration Package is a package of files containing all the default parameter settings and any User changes to alarm severity levels, relay assignments, signal names, and PLC expressions.

Note: A Language Package is a package of files containing all the default names of the parameters in two languages. Typically these would be in English and Chinese. The language package cannot be changed by the User. Consult Emerson if a different language package is required.

Note: A file named “SettingParam.run” is automatically created/appended by the Controller whenever a User (or the factory at the time of shipment) makes changes to any parameter settings via the LCD or WEB interface.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

135 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Retrieve ‘SettingParam.run’ File Sub-Menu

See also “Backing Up the ACU+ Configuration” on page 26.

A file, named “SettingParam.run”, is automatically created by the Controller whenever a User (or the factory at the time of shipment) makes changes to any parameter settings via the LCD or WEB interface.

Click on the “Retrieve File” button to save the file named "SettingParam.run" to your hard drive.

Note: Ensure Internet Explorer security settings are set to enable a file to be copied to your computer.

To aid in file management, you may change the name of the “SettingParam.run” file. The new name can use alpha and numeric characters preceding the original “SettingParam.run” name (the end of the new file name must always be “SettingParam.run”; for example, an acceptable filename would be “seville4SettingParam.run”).

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

136 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Time Sync Sub-Menu

Use the "Time Sync" submenu to set the Controller’s clock. First click "Get Local Zone" to obtain the time zone from the local host. Then click "Get Local Time" to obtain the time from the local host. Finally, click the "Setting" button to update the Controller’s time.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

137 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

System Inventory Sub-Menu

The “System Inventory” submenu allows you to view the product revision, serial number, and software revision information of the intelligent devices (such as rectifier, SMDU, and IB board) connected to the Controller.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

138 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Configuration Menu

Auto Configuration Sub-Menu

The auto configuration feature scans the system for intelligent equipment connected to the Controller (such as SMDU, IB, and EIB) and configures these into the Controller automatically.

To start the auto configuration process, click on the "Auto Configuration" button.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

139 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Site Information Modification Sub-Menu

Here you can add or change Site information. You can enter information such as a site name, site location, and site description. Click on the "Set" button to store the Site information entered. After you change the Site information you will need to reboot the controller to see the changes.

Note: After rebooting, you must exit your browser and re-login to see any changes made.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

140 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Equipment Information Modification Sub-Menu

Here you can change the name of an equipment device connected to the Controller. Equipment devices have two names. One is the

“Device Full Name” and another is the “Device Abbreviated Name”. The “Device Full Name” is displayed in the WEB Interface menus and the “Device Abbreviated Name” is displayed in the local LCD display menus.

Enter the new device name in the “New Device Name” column and select what Device Name is to be changed (“Device Full Name” or

“Device Abbreviated Name”). Click on the "Set" button to save the new name.

Device Full Name (32 characters maximum).

Device Abbreviated Name (15 characters maximum).

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

141 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Signal Information Modification Sub-Menu

Here you can change the name of signals connected to the Controller. Signals have two names. One is the “Signal Full Name” and another is the “Signal Abbreviated Name”. The “Signal Full Name” is displayed in the WEB Interface menus and the “Signal Abbreviated

Name” is displayed in the local LCD display menus.

Enter the new signal name in the “New Name” column and select what Name is to be changed (“Signal Full Name” or “Signal Abbreviated

Name”). Click on the "Set" button to save the new name.

Signal Full Name (32 characters maximum).

Signal Abbreviated Name (15 characters maximum).

Note: If a signal is renamed it is recommended to retain enough information about the physical location of the signal as possible. As an example, if you want to assign a name of 'Intrusion 6' to the signal who's default name is 'DI1 Alarm' it could be labeled 'DI1 Intrusion 6'.

This will help in physically locating the wiring etc. related to the 'Intrusion 6' alarm. Alternately, the customer could label the wiring and/or position that is related to the signal name.

Sample Signal Name Modification Procedure

The following procedure demonstrates how to change the “System Voltage” to “Bus Voltage”.

1.

Select the equipment to which this signal belongs: Power System.

2.

Select the signal type to which the signal belongs: Sample Signal.

3.

Enter new signal name: Bus Voltage.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

142 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

4.

Select the type of signal name to be changed: “Signal Full Name” or “Signal Abbreviated Name”.

5.

Click the “Set” button.

For alarm signals, you can also change the alarm level (severity) for the alarm signal.

In the second step in the above procedure, select “Alarm Signal”, then the alarm signal name and alarm level are displayed. Select “New alarm level” and click “Set” to change the alarm level (severity) of this alarm signal.

Alarm Suppressing Sub-Menu

Here you can modify the Alarm Suppression relationships of an alarm signal.

Alarm Suppression Explanation: If Alarm A suppresses Alarm B, when Alarm A occurs, Alarm B will not be reported even if the conditions of Alarm B are met. For example, AC failure alarm will suppress AC low voltage alarm. When AC failure occurs, the alarm conditions for both AC failure alarm and AC low voltage alarm are met, and both alarms should be reported. However, since the AC failure alarm suppresses the AC low voltage alarm, only AC failure alarm is displayed in the alarm list.

To configure Alarm Suppression, first select the device to which the alarm signal belongs. This displays all the alarm signals of this device.

Locate the alarm signal to be configured for Alarm Suppression and click on the “Modify” button for this alarm signal.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

143 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

The following screen appears which allows you to configure the Alarm Suppression Expression. In this screen, you can select the signals in the Alarm Suppression Expression and enter the logic relationship before the alarm signal (Logic AND &, Logic OR |, Logic NO!).

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

144 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

PLC Sub-Menu

Allows you to configure the PLC functions of the Controller.

The following shows the PLC sub-menu.

Operation

The PLC function normally runs every 10 seconds. It starts by executing the first line and stores the result in the output signal/register.

Then executes the next line and continues executing line by line until it reaches the end. The PLC function will be stopped if the ACU+ is set to Manual Mode.

PROCEDURE

1.

Click the ADD button and the window below is shown.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

145 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Column Descriptions

• Operator: The Operator column selects the type of function that will be performed. The list of Operators is shown in the Symbol Information table (from line 3 and down) in the previous PLC screen.

• Input 1: The Input 1 column is divided into the following three sub-columns. a) EquipName/Register: This column shows the Equipment that the signal to be selected in c) below is associated with. (Equipment is not necessarily connected to a physical device. An Equipment can be connected to several physical devices and vice versa.)

The Equipment can be replaced by a Register. Every Register is given a unique number between 0 and 99. A

Register works as a temporary storage place that will be cleared after every run of the PLC function. b) Signal Type: This column shows the type of signal to be selected in c) below.

The ACU+ has four different signal types:

• Sample (measured or calculated values, status).

• Control (control of different functions or events).

• Setting (different kind of settings).

• Alarm (alarms, these signals will only be activated if the alarm category is set to anything else than NA). c) Signal Name: You select the signal from this column. Signals that are shown in the drop-down list box are based on your selections in a) and b) above.

• Input 2: (See Input 1 above.)

• Param 1: This column shows if any parameter is used.

A parameter is just a way to enter a value, which can be used in compares with signals.

• Param 2: (See Param 1 above.)

• Output: The Output column is divided in three sub-columns, which has the same information as for the Inputs.

2.

Choose the type of Operator. The web page will disable some boxes that are not applicable for the type of Operator.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

146 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

3.

Select Signal or Register for Input 1.

4.

Enter either the register number or choose the equipment, signal type, and signal name. The format for entering a register is

R(x), where x is the number of the register.

5.

Setup Input 2 in the same way as Input 1 if it’s not disabled.

6.

Enter Param 1 and Param 2 if they are not disabled. The format for entering a parameter is P(x), where x is the value.

7.

Select Signal or Register for Output.

8.

Enter either the register number or choose the equipment, signal type, and signal name.

9.

Click the ADD button in the bottom of the window.

10.

Reboot the ACU+. See “Restore Defaults Sub-Menu” on page 132.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

147 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Alarm Relay Sub-Menu

Allows you to map system alarms to the alarm relays.

Select the device to display the system alarms associated to it. Also displayed is the alarm relay number assigned to this alarm. To modify the alarm relay number, click on the “Modify” button for that alarm signal.

“NA” means there is no related relay number.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

148 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Accessing the Controller via a

Network Management System (NMS)

General

The Controller has an SNMP agent function.

Users can use a Network Management System (NMS) to do the following operations:

• Query the operation status and input/output signals of the devices connected to the Controller.

• Browse the active alarms.

When the Controller generates alarms, the SNMP agent can be configured to notify the NMS through TRAPS automatically.

NMS Supported by SNMP Agent

SNMP is a technology used for network management. The technology is based on implementing an information base called

MIB (Managed Information Base). This MIB contains parameters that are of interest from a management perspective. All LAN connected equipment that support SNMP also support a default

MIB called MIB-II.

The SNMP Agent responds to requests received via the SNMP protocol and also actively sends TRAPS to a specified manager when certain MIB values change state. This is used to actively inform a manager when an alarm situation is recognized.

NMS Supported by SNMP v2

The SNMP agent of the Controller supports SNMP v2.

All NMS that supports SNMPv2c can be used to access the

Controller. This includes HP OpenView, IBM NetView, Novell

ManageWise, SunNet Manager, and so on.

NMS Supported by SNMP v3

The ACU+ has SSL and SNMP v3 function, which makes the ACU+ more powerful and more secure.

With SSL, you can browse/set the webpage with https. Data is encrypted in the transmission. You can also browse/set the MIB library with SNMP v3. Data is also encrypted in the transmission.

Here we use https.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

149 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Parameter Setting in SNMP Manager

The permitted User to access the agent.

The get/set data security level

(NoAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, or

AuthPriv).

The private DES password used to encrypt the data.

The authorization MD5 password used to encrypt the digital signature.

MIB Installation

Installation

The Controller’s MIB is named "Netsure_ESNA.mib". Contact your

Emerson representative for the location on the Web to download the MIB file.

Use the MIB loading function of the NMS to load the MIB database.

Refer to the User Manual provided with the NMS for the detailed loading method.

Contents of the Controller’s MIB

The contents of the MIB supported by the Controller’s SNMP agent

and the OID are listed in Table 6 . For the details, refer to the MIB

file named "Netsure_ESNA.mib".

Table 6. Contents of the Controller’s MIB

Table 6

Ident Group identManufacturer identModel identControllerFirmwareVersion identName

Controller Ident Group

The name of the equipment manufacturer.

The manufacturers model designation of the power system.

The firmware (software) version of the Controller.

The name of the power plant. This object should be set by the administrator.

R

R

R

R/W

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

150 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 6

Ident Group

System Group systemStatus systemVoltage systemCurrent systemUsedCapacity psBattery Group psBatteryVoltage psBatteryCurrent psInput Group psInputLineAVoltage psInputLineBVoltage psInputLineCVoltage psTemperature Group psTemperature1 psTemperature2 psStatusCommunication

Controller Ident Group

Controller System Value Group

Status of the complete plant (highest alarm). One of...

(1) unknown - status has not yet been defined

(2) normal - there are no activated alarms

(3) warning - OA, lowest level of 'abnormal' status

(4) minor - A3

(5) major - MA

(6) critical - CA, highest level of 'abnormal' status

(7) unmanaged

(8) restricted

(9) testing

(10) disabled

System voltage, stored as mV.

System current, stored as mA.

Used capacity, stored as percentage of the total capacity .

Power System Battery Group

Battery voltage, stored as mV.

Battery current, stored as mA.

Power System Input Group

The AC line A voltage, stored as mV.

The AC line B voltage, stored as mV.

The AC line C voltage, stored as mV.

Power System Temperature Group

The first route temperature, stored as 0.001 Celsius degree.

The second route temperature, stored as 0.001 Celsius degree.

The status of communication with the Power System.

(1) unknown

(2) normal

(3) interrupt indicates some errors occurred between Power System and agent

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

151 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 6

Ident Group psStatusBatteryMode

SM Series Group psSMACNumber psSMBATNumber psSMIONumber

Alarm Trap Group alarmLastTrapNo alarmTrapTable

(alarmTrapEntry) alarmTrapNo alarmTime alarmStatusChange alarmSeverity alarmDescription alarmType

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

Controller Ident Group

The status of battery modes.

(1) unknown

(2) FloatCharging

(3) ShortTest

(4) EqualizeChargingForTest

(5) ManualTesting

(6) PlanTesting

(7) ACFailTesting

(8) ACFail

(9) ManualEqualizeCharging

(10) AutoEqualizeCharging

(11) CyclicEqualizeCharging

(12) MasterEqualizeCharging

(13) MasterBatteryTesting

Supervisory Module Group

The number of SM AC module.

The number of SM BAT module.

The number of SM IO module.

Controller Alarm Trap Group

The sequence number of last submitted alarm trap.

Table holding information about the submitted alarm traps. alarmTrapEntry is the entry (conceptual row) in the alarmTrapTable.

The unique sequence number of this alarm trap.

Date and time when event occurred (local time), including timezone if supported by Controller.

The type of alarm change. One of...

(1) activated

(2) deactivated

The severity of the alarm. One of...

(1) warning - OA, lowest level of alarm severity

(2) minor - A3

(3) major - MA

(4) critical - CA, highest level of alarm severity

Free-text description of alarm.

Alarm type, i.e. an integer specifying the type of alarm.

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

152 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Table 6

Ident Group Controller Ident Group

Traps Alarm Traps Info

--

The SNMP agent can send the active alarms to the specified NMS and the User can define the lowest severity of the NMS accepted alarms.

--

In Table 6 , R means OID is read-only (GET), and R/W means OID can be read and modified (GET/SET).

Accessing the Controller through an NMS

Apply Administrative Authority

In order to use the NMS to manage the devices connected to the Controller, the administrative authority needs to be applied for the

NMS, that is, add the NMS information to the access list of SNMP agent.

Add NMS through Web Browser

Refer to “NMSV2 (Network Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu (versions 1 and 2)” on page 125 and “NMSV3 (Network

Management System) Configuration Sub-Menu (version 3)” on page 126 for the method of adding NMS.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

153 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Replacement Procedures

ACU+ Controller Replacement

Danger

DANGER! Follow all “Important Safety Instructions” found in the documentation provided with the system the ACU+ Controller is installed in.

Warning

WARNING! ACU+ CONTROLLER HANDLING.

Installation or removal of the ACU+ Controller requires careful handling. To avoid possibility of ACU+ Controller damage from static discharge, a static wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor should always be worn when handling the ACU+ Controller. ESDprotective packaging material must also be used when

carrying/shipping the ACU+ Controller.

Note: Depending on your network security settings, when you remove a device that is connected to your network and assign the same IP address to the replacement device, you may not be allowed to communicate with the replacement device over the network. Contact your network administrator for assistance.

The ACU+ Controller is hot swappable. It can be removed and installed with the system operating and without affecting the output bus.

PROCEDURE

1.

Before performing this procedure, ensure the replacement ACU+ Controller contains the same configuration package as the existing ACU+ Controller.

Refer to the Configuration Label on the side of the replacement ACU+ Controller for the Configuration Part

Number. If the existing Controller is operational, navigate the menus to view its configuration package (MAIN

SCREEN/ESC/ENT/ENT).

Figure 10. ACU+ Controller Configuration Label Location

2.

Performing this procedure may activate external alarms.

Do one of the following. If possible, disable these alarms.

If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system while this procedure is being performed.

3.

Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist.

Attach the other end to a suitable ground.

4.

Loosen the captive fastener securing the latch mechanism to the front of the ACU+ Controller. Pull the latch mechanism away from the ACU+ Controller (this will retract the latch mechanism located on the bottom of the ACU+ Controller). This unlocks the ACU+

Controller from the shelf. Refer to Figure 11 .

5.

Slide the ACU+ Controller completely from the shelf.

6.

Loosen the captive fastener securing the latch mechanism to the front of the replacement ACU+

Controller. Pull the latch mechanism away from the ACU+

Controller (this will retract the latch mechanism located on the bottom of the ACU+ Controller).

7.

Slide the ACU+ Controller completely into its mounting position.

8.

Push the latch mechanism into the front panel of the

ACU+ Controller, and secure by tightening the captive fastener. This locks the ACU+ Controller securely to the shelf.

9.

Wait for the Controller to finish booting and verify that the complete system operates normally.

10.

Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.

11.

Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.

Figure 11. Latch Mechanism on the ACU+ Controller

M820D M820B

M820D

Configuration File

Part N um ber Label

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

M820B

154

Captive Fastener

Latch Mechanism

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

Specifications

Input Voltage Range: 19 to 60 VDC.

Power Consumption: 5W.

Operating Temperature Range: -40°C (-40°F) to +75°C (+167°F).

Humidity: Capable of operating in an ambient relative humidity range of 0% to 90%, non-condensing.

Dimensions:

• Model M820B: 42mm (H) x 86.6mm (W) x 211.5mm (D)

1.65” (H) x 3.41” (W) x 8.33” (D)

• Model M820D: 86.6mm (H) × 86.8mm (W) × 211.5mm (D)

3.41” (H) x 3.41” (W) x 8.33” (D)

Weight: < 1kg (2.2 lbs).

Front Panel Display: LCD with 4 x 16 (Model M820D) or 8 x 16 (Model M820B) characters.

Indicators:

• Status (Green)

• Minor Alarm (Yellow)

• Critical / Major Alarm (Red)

Local and Remote Access Passwords: Refer to “Passwords and Access Levels” on page 12.

Inputs and Outputs: Connection points provided on ACU+ Interface Board(s) mounted in the system. Refer to your system documentation.

Factory Default Setpoints: Refer to the Configuration Drawing (C-drawing) furnished with your system for a list of factory default values.

Spec. No: 1M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

155 Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

NetSure ™ ACU+ Controller (Advanced Control Unit Plus)

User Instructions, UM1M820BNA (Issue AK, March 3, 2014)

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and may not be suitable for all applications. While every precaution has been taken to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems,

North America, Inc. assumes no responsibility and disclaims all liability for damages resulting from use of this information or for any errors or omissions. Refer to other local practices or building codes as applicable for the correct methods, tools, and materials to be used in performing procedures not specifically described in this document.

The products covered by this instruction manual are manufactured and/or sold by Emerson

Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. This document is the property of

Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North

America, Inc. Any copying, use or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson

Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies. Any questions regarding usage of trademark names should be directed to the original manufacturer.

EmersonNetworkPower.com/EnergySystems (North America)

EmersonNetworkPower.eu/EnergySystems (EMEA)

© Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. 2014.

Business-Critical Continuity ™ , Emerson Network Power trademar ks of Emerson Electric Co. EnergyMaster

™ , the Emerson Netw ork Power logo , Emerson

™ , eSure ™ , NetPer form ™ , NetR each ™ , NetSpan

™ and Conside r it Solved are serv ice marks and

™ , NetSure ™ and NetXtend ™ are tradema rks of Emerson

Network Power, Energy Syste ms, North America, Inc . Any other product, brand, or company names or logos are the property of the respective owner.

While every precaution has been taken to ensure accuracy and completeness herein, Emerson Electric Co. assumes no responsibility, and disclaims all liability, for damages resulting from use of this information or for any errors or omissions. Specifications subject to change without notice.

Spec. No: M820BNA, 1M820DNA

Model No: M820B, M820D

Code: UM1M820BNA

Issue AK, March 3, 2014

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents